Pioneer Super Tuner III D DVH-P5850MP Operation Manual
Black plate (1,1) Operation Manual Multi-CD control high power D VD/Video CD/CD/MP3/ WMA player with FM/AM tuner D VH-P5850MP <CRB2123-A/U>1 English
Black plate (2,1) <CRB2123-A/U>2 Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please rea d through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model prope rly . After you have finished read ing the instr uctions, keep this ma n- ual in a safe pla ce for future refer ence. Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 6 ! DVD video disc region numbers 6 ! When an operation is prohibited 9 Precautions T o ensure safe driving 5 Before Y ou Start About this unit 6 Playable discs 6 DVD video disc region numbers 6 About this manual 7 F eatures 7 About WMA 8 What the marks on DVDs indicate 9 Use and care of the remote control 9 What îÂÂs What Head unit 11 Remote control 12 Basic Operations Using the remote control operation mode switch 15 T urning the unit on 15 Selecting a source 15 Loading a disc 16 Adjusting the volume 16 T urning the unit off 16 P rotecting your unit from theft 17 T uner Listening to the radio 18 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 19 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 19 T uning in strong signals 19 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 20 Playing DVD video discs W atching a DVD video 21 Basic operation of DVD video 21 Specifying title 22 Specifying chapter 22 Selecting a chapter directly 22 F rame-by-frame playback 23 P ausing DVD video playback 23 Slow motion playback 23 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 23 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 24 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 24 Resume playback (Bookmark) 25 Operating from the information displays 25 Operating from the function display 28 Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD 29 Basic operation of Video CD 29 Specifying track 30 Selecting a track directly 30 P ausing Video CD playback 30 Slow motion playback 31 Operating from the information display 31 Operating from the function display 33 Playing CDs Listening to a CD 34 Basic operation of CD 34 Operating from the information display 35 Contents En 2
Black plate (3,1) <CRB2123-A/U>3 Operating from the function display 37 Playing MP3/WMA Listening to MP3/WMA 40 Basic operation of MP3/WMA 40 Operating from the information display 42 Operating from the function display 44 Multi-CD Player Playing a CD 47 Selecting a track directly 47 50-disc multi-CD player 48 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 48 Repeating play 48 Playing tracks in random order 49 Scanning CDs and tracks 49 P ausing CD playback 49 Using ITS playlists 50 Using disc title functions 51 Using CD TEXT functions 52 Using compression and dynamic bass emphasis 53 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 54 Using the equalizer 55 Compensating for equalizer cur ves (EQ- EX) 55 Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) 55 Using balance adjustment 56 Adjusting equalizer cur ves 56 Fine-adjusting equalizer cur ve 57 Adjusting bass and treble 57 Adjusting loudness 58 Using subwoofer output 58 Using nonfading output 59 Using the high pass filter 59 Adjusting source levels 60 Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustmen ts 61 Using the sound field control 62 Using the position selector 63 Using balance adjustment 63 Adjusting source levels 63 Using the dynamic range control 64 Using the direct control 64 Using the down-mix function 64 Using the Dolby P ro Logic II 65 Setting the speaker setting 66 Selecting a cross-over frequency 67 Adjusting the speaker output levels 67 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 68 Using the time alignment 68 Using the auto-equalizer 69 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 69 Using the equalizer 72 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 74 Returning to the previous display 74 Setting the subtitle language 74 Setting the audio language 75 Setting the menu language 75 Setting assist subtitles on or off 76 Setting angle icon display 76 Setting the aspect ratio 76 Setting the parental lock 77 Automatic playback of DVDs 78 Setting remote control code type 78 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 79 Setting the clock 79 En 3 Contents
Black plate (4,1) <CRB2123-A/U>4 Setting the FM tuning step 79 Setting the AM tuning step 80 Switching the warning tone 80 Switching the auxiliar y setting 80 Switching the dimmer setting 80 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 81 Switching the telephone muting/ attenuation 81 Switching the automatic disc playback 82 Correcting distorted sound 82 Resetting the audio functions 82 Other Functions T urning the clock display on or off 83 Setting the level indicator 83 Using the AUX source 83 Switching between digital and analog 84 Introduction of DVD operation 84 Using the PGM button 85 Additional Information T roubleshooting 86 Error messages 88 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 89 DVD player and care 90 DVD discs 90 CD-R/CD-RW discs 91 MP3 and WMA files 91 About folders and MP3/WMA files 93 Language code chart for DVD 94 T erms 95 Specifications 98 Contents En 4
Black plate (5,1) <CRB2123-A/U>5 T o ensure safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWIT CH. IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where it is a visible distraction to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit îÂÂs DVD features should not be used. This unit detects whether your car îÂÂs parking brake is engaged or not, and prevents you from watching a DVD or Video CD on the dis- play connected to FRONT VIDEO OUTPUT while driving. When you attempt to watch a DVD/Video CD, the screen will turn black. When you park your car in a safe place and apply the parking brake, the picture appears on the screen. When using a display connected to DVD REAR MONI TOR OUTPUT This unit îÂÂs DVD REAR MONITOR OUTPUT is for connection of a display to enable passen- gers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or Video CD. WARNING NEVER install the display in a location that en- ables the driver to watch the DVD or Video CD while driving. Precautions En 5 Section 01 Precautions
Black plate (6,1) <CRB2123-A/U>6 About this unit CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat could result from contact with liquids. ! î CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCTî This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac- cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser- vicing to qualified personnel. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memor y will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Ser- vice Station. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Li- censing Corporation. ! It is not possible to play back DVD audio disc. This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. Before Y ou Start En 6 Section 02
Black plate (7,1) <CRB2123-A/U>7 The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit îÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. This manual mainly explains remote control operation. However , in addition to those func- tions related with DVD/Video CD/CD/MP3/ WMA operation that can only be operated by the remote control, there are also functions that can be operated similarly by the head unit and functions that can only be operated by the buttons provided for the head unit. Features DVD video playback It is possible to play back DVD video, DVD -R (video mode) and DVD-RW (video mode). Remember that use of this system for com- mercial or public viewing purposes may con- stitute an infringement on the author îÂÂs rights protected by the Copyright Law . Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). CD playback Music CD/CD -R/CD-RW playback is possible. MP3 file playback Y ou can play back MP3 files recorded on CD- ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a li- cense for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad- casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net- works or in other electronic content distri- bution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An inde- pendent license for such use is required. F or details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. WMA file playback Y ou can play back WMA files recorded on CD- ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). NTSC/P AL compatibility This unit is NTSC/P AL system compatible. When connecting other components to this unit, be sure components are compatible with the same video system other wise images will not be correctly reproduced. Before Y ou Start En 7 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Black plate (8,1) <CRB2123-A/U>8 Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility ! Manufactured under license from Dolby La- boratories. îÂÂDolby îÂÂ, îÂÂPro Logic îÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ! î DTSî is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Multi-channel processor control When using this unit with a P ioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo- sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel re- cordings. Multi-aspect Switching between wide screen, letterbox and panscan display is possible. Multi-audio Y ou can switch between multiple audio sys- tems recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-subtitle Y ou can switch between multiple subtitle lan- guages recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-angle Y ou can switch between multiple viewing an- gles of a scene recorded on a DVD as desired. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA The Windows Media " logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsof t Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Notes ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate correctly . ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
Black plate (9,1) <CRB2123-A/U>9 What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the number of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the number of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the number of viewing an- gles. 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to-height ratio) type. 2 3 4 ALL Indicates the number of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( îÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray. WARNING Keep the batter y out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y . ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the batter y in fire. ! Do not handle the batter y with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institutions î rules that apply in your countr y/area. ! Always check carefully that you are loading the batter y with its plus ( ) and minus ( îÂÂ) poles facing in the proper directions. Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Black plate (10,1) <CRB2123-A/U>10 Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
Black plate (1 1,1) <CRB2123-A/U>11 Head unit 1 DISPLA Y button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress to select differ ent displays. 2 VOLUME When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. T o re- tract VOLUME, press it again. Rotate it to increase or decrease the volume. 3 CLOCK button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress to change to the clock display . 4 BAND button P ress to select among three FM bands and one AM band and to cancel the control mode of functions. 5 OPEN button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress to open the front panel. 6 F (function) button P ress to select func tions. 7 a /b /c /d buttons When controlling sources ! These buttons can per form the same op- eration as m/ n/ o/ p/ r/ q but- tons on the remote control. P ress to do manual seek tuning, fast for ward, re- verse, track search and folder select con- trols. When controlling functions ! These buttons can per form the same op- eration as r/ q/ m/ n buttons on the remote control. 8 A (audio) button P ress to select various sound quality con- trols. 9 EQ-EX button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress and hold to switch between EQ-EX and SFEQ functions. Press to operate each function. a 1 îÂÂ6 buttons These buttons can per form the same opera- tion as NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) buttons on the re- mote control. P ress for preset tuning and disc number search when using a multi-CD/ DVD player . 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c 3 What î s Wha t En 11 Section 03 What î s What
Black plate (12,1) <CRB2123-A/U>12 b EQ button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress to select various equalizer cur ves. c SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. Remote control 1 Remote control selection switch Switch to change the setting of the remote control. For details, refer to Setting remote control code type on page 78. 2 VOLUME button P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 3 TOP MENU (TOP .M) button P ress to return to the top menu during DVD playback. 4 MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback. 1 1 1 2 f f f g g g h h h i i i j k k k l l l m m m d c b b b a 9 9 9 8 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 n n n o o o p p p e e e What î s Wha t En 12 Section 03
Black plate (13,1) <CRB2123-A/U>13 5 RETURN button P ress to return to the previous display when the SET -UP MENU is displayed. P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback. 6 AUDIO button P ress to change the audio language during DVD playback. 7 DISPLA Y button P ress to change the information display while the DVD player is playing as the source. 8 SUBTITLE (S.TITILE) button P ress to change the subtitle language dur- ing DVD playback. 9 ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. a PLA Y/P AUSE ( f) button P ress to switch sequentially between play- back and pause. b REVERSE ( m) button P ress to perform fast reverse playback or seek tuning while the tuner is playing as the source. c PREVIOUS ( o)/F (function) button When the remote control is set to DVD mode, press to return to the previous track (chapter). If the remote control is set to DVH mode, the function menu appears on the head unit display . d NUMBER buttons P ress to directly select the desired track, chapter , preset tuning and disc. 1 îÂÂ6 buttons can operate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc number search for the multi-CD player . e DIRECT button P ress to do direct channel select. f SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. g Joystick Move to select the setting. Click to set the setting or select on or off . h Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between DVD mode (only the DVD player can be operated by the remote control) or DVH mode (all sources of this unit can be operated by the remote control). (Refer to page 15.) i BAND button P ress to select among three FM bands and one AM band and to cancel the control mode of functions. j BOOKMARK (BOOK.M) button DVH mode P ress to operate the preprogrammed func- tions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 85.) DVD mode P ress to turn the bookmark function on or off . For details, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 25. k STEP ( r/ q) button P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback. P ress and hold for one second to activate slow play- back. l A TT button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. P ress once more to return to the original volume level. What î s Wha t En 13 Section 03 What î s What
Black plate (14,1) <CRB2123-A/U>14 m FORW ARD ( n) button P ress to perform fast for ward playback or seek tuning while the tuner is playing as the source. n STOP ( g) button P ress to stop playback. o NEXT ( p)/A (audio) button When the remote control is set to DVD mode, press to go to the next track (chap- ter). If the remote control is set to DVH mode, the audio menu appears on the head unit display . p CLEAR button P ress to cancel the input number when NUMBER are used. What î s Wha t En 14 Section 03
Black plate (15,1) <CRB2123-A/U>15 Using the remote control operation mode switch There are two remote control operation modes on the remote control. If you want to operate this unit by remote control, turn the mode switch to DVH mode. In this case, both the head unit îÂÂs buttons and remote control can control this unit. DVH mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, the mode is normally switched to DVH. ! It is possible to use the r/ q/ m / n buttons on the remote control to per form the same operations as the a/ b/ c/ d but- tons on the head unit. ! Numbers ( 1 îÂÂ6) can per form the same op- erations as 1 îÂÂ6 buttons on the head unit. î If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using buttons 1 îÂÂ6, press and hold the corresponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number ap- pears in the display . DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD, the joystick and NUMBER operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Basic operation of DVD video on page 21.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using NUMBER . (Refer to Watching a V ideo CD on page 29.) ! When specifying title or track by using NUMBER . (Refer to Specifying title on page 22 and Specifying track on page 30.) Note If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. T ur ning the unit on % Press SOURCE to turn the unit on. When you select a source, the unit is turned on. Selecting a source Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. If DSC-A is turned on, load a disc in the unit to switch to DVD (refer to Switching the auto - matic disc playback on page 82). % Press SOURCE to select a source. P ress SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER (tuner) î TV (television) î AV (video input) î DVD (built-in DVD player) î S DVD (DVD player/multi-DVD player) î MUL TI CD (multi-CD player) î EXT (external unit 1) î EXT (external unit 2) î AUX (AUX) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: î When there is no unit corresponding to the selected source connected to this unit. î When there is no disc in the unit. î When there is no disc in the DVD player . î When there is no magazine in the multi- CD player . î When there is no magazine in the multi- DVD player . Basic Operations En 15 Section 04 Basic Operations
Black plate (16,1) <CRB2123-A/U>16 î When the AUX (auxiliar y input) is set to off (refer to page 80). ! External unit refers to a P ioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit îÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the car îÂÂs auto-antenna relay control term- inal, the car îÂÂs antenna extends when this unit îÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the an- tenna, turn the source off . (When you con- nected a Pioneer multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7650) to this unit, auto -antenna cannot be controled.) Loading a disc 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. Disc loading slot appears. # After a disc has been inserted, press SOURCE to select the DVD player . 2 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. When you set DSC-A:ON, playback will auto- matically start. If you set DSC-A:OFF, press SOURCE to select DVD (refer to the previous page). Disc loading slot EJECT button # T o eject a disc, press EJECT. # T o avoid a malfunction, make sure that no metal object comes into contact with the term- inals when the front panel is open. 3 Close the fr ont panel. Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 6. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting it again. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to Error messages on page 88. ! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 25. Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. With the head unit, rotate VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T ur ning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. Basic Operations En 16 Section 04
Black plate (17,1) <CRB2123-A/U>17 Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the protective case provided to discourage theft. ! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. ! Y ou can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warning tone on page 80. Important ! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attach- ing. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Removing the front panel 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2 Gently grip the left side of the front panel and slowly pull it outward. T ake care not to grip it too tightly or to drop the front panel and protect it from contact with water or other fluids to prevent perma- nent damage. 3 Put the front panel into the protective case provided for safe keeping. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by holding it upright to the unit and clipping it securely into the mounting hooks. Basic Operations En 17 Section 04 Basic Operations
Black plate (18,1) <CRB2123-A/U>18 Listening to the radio 2 1 3 5 4 4 4 These are the basic steps necessar y to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to , AM or FM. 2 Signal level indicator Shows the radio wave strength. 3 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned. 4 Stereo ( 5) indicator Shows when the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 5 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 1 Press SOURCE to select the tuner . P ress SOURCE until you see TUNER dis- played. 2 Press BAND to select a band. P ress BAND until the desired band is dis- played, F1, F2, F3 for FM or AM . 3 T o perform manual tuning, press m or n with quick presses. The frequencies move up or down step by step. 4 T o perform seek tuning, press and hold m or n for about one second and re - lease. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by pressing either m or n with a quick press. # If you press and hold m or n you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the buttons. Note When the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo the stereo ( 5) indicator will light. T uner En 18 Section 05
Black plate (19,1) <CRB2123-A/U>19 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 2 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: BSM (best stations memor y) î LOCAL (local seek tuning) # T o return to the frequency display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the frequency display . Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you press any of the NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button. % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press a NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. The next time you press the same NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y. Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memory. ! Y ou can also use q and r to recall radio station frequencies assigned to NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) . T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Press F to select LOCAL. P ress F until LOCAL appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn local seek tuning on. Local seek sensitivity (e.g., LOCAL 2) appears in the display . 3 Press m or n to set the sensitivity . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: LOCAL 1 î LOCAL 2 î LOCAL 3 î LOCAL 4 AM: LOCAL 1 î LOCAL 2 The LOCAL 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. T uner En 19 Section 05 T uner
Black plate (20,1) <CRB2123-A/U>20 4 When you want to return to normal seek tuning, press q to turn local seek tuning off. LOCAL:OFF appears in the display. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) and once stored there you can tune in to those frequen- cies with the touch of a button. 1 Press F to select BSM. P ress F until BSM appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, press q. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may re- place broadcast frequencies you have saved using NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6). T uner En 20 Section 05
Black plate (21,1) <CRB2123-A/U>21 W atching a DVD video 1 4 2 2 2 5 3 3 3 6 6 Head unit îÂÂs display 2 2 2 6 3 3 3 1 1 1 When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Information display These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD video with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD video operation is explained start- ing on page 25. 1 DVD (DVD-V) indicator Shows when a DVD video is playing. 2 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. ! On the head unit îÂÂs display , if the elapsed playing time of current chapter is more than 100 minutes, T in the title number indicator disappears. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter . 4 dts indicator Shows the DTS is on when the multi-chan- nel processor (DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit. 5 Dolby Digital indicator Shows when the Dolby Digital is turned on. 6 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. Basic operation of DVD video 1 Use the joystick to select the desired menu option. When the DVD offers a menu, a menu is dis- played. 2 Click the joystick. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # Y ou can display the menu by pressing the MENU or TOP MENU (TOP .M) while a disc is playing. Pressing either of these buttons again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. For details, refer to the instruc- tions provided with the disc. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the color of the icon m/ n changes from white to blue. When this happens, fast re- verse/fast for ward continues even if you release m or n . T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Playing DVD video discs En 21 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (22,1) <CRB2123-A/U>22 4 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next chapter . Pressing o once skips to the start of the current chapter . Pressing again will skip to the previous chapter . Chapter numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Using NUMBER also per forms the same op- eration. For more details, refer to Specifying chap- ter on this page. # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 5 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop DVD playback by pressing g, that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Specifying title T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired title number when the disc is stopped. Title number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected title. ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10, 10 and 3 in that order . Specifying chapter T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired chapter number during playback. Chapter number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected chapter . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10, 10 and 3 in that order . Selecting a chapter directly When using the remote control, you can select a chapter directly by entering the desired chapter number . 1 Press DIRECT. Chapter number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired chapter number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The chapter of entered number will play . Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. Playing DVD video discs En 22 Section 06
Black plate (23,1) <CRB2123-A/U>23 Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % Press r . Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! There is no sound during frame-by-frame play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. ! Reverse frame-by-frame playback is not possi- ble. Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Press r and hold during playback. The icon î î is displayed, forward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . 2 Press r or q to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press r or q it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 î 1/8 î 1/4 î 1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. 1 Press AUDIO during playback. The audio selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press AUDIO while the audio selection icon is displayed. The audio changes each time you press AUDIO . Playing DVD video discs En 23 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (24,1) <CRB2123-A/U>24 Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD îÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded lan- guages/audio systems. ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using SET -UP MENU . For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 75. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit îÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! While the audio selection icon is displayed, you can also switch to a desired audio lan- guage number using NUMBER. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. 1 Press SUBTITLE (S.TITILE) during play- back. The subtitle selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press SUBTITLE (S.TITILE) while the sub- title selection icon is displayed. The subtitle language changes each time you press SUBTITLE (S.TITILE). Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD îÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded subtitle languages. ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using SET -UP MENU . For details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 74. ! While the subtitle selection icon is displayed, you can also switch to a desired subtitle lan- guage number using NUMBER. At this time, you can also switch subtitle display off by pressing CLEAR. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using SET -UP MENU . For details, refer to Setting angle icon display on page 76. 1 Press ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. The angle icon and angle number are displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press ANGLE while the angle icon and angle number are displayed. The angle changes each time you press ANGLE . Playing DVD video discs En 24 Section 06
Black plate (25,1) <CRB2123-A/U>25 Notes ! The 3 mark on a DVD îÂÂs package indicates it features multi-angle scenes. The number in the 3 mark indicates the number of angles from which scenes were shot. ! P ressing ANGLE during fast forward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback, but the viewing angle does not change. ! While the angle icon and angle number are displayed, you can also switch to a desired angle number using NUMBER. Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. % During playback, press BOOKMARK (BOOK.M) at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to five discs. After that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press and hold BOOKMARK (BOOK.M) during playback. # Y ou can also bookmark a disc by pressing and holding EJECT at the point you want to bookmark. Next time you load the disc, playback will resume from the bookmarked point. Note that you can only bookmark one disc using this method. T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press EJECT. Operating from the information displays 1 1 1 Information display 1 lets you use the search function to specify a title or chapter to search for a desired scene, use the time search func- tion to specify a time to search for a desired scene, select the desired audio and subtitle language, and select the angle. In addition to the search and time search functions of the information display 1, infor- mation display 2 lets you select the range for repeat play. 1 Information display Shows the function status. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display 1 î Information dis- play 2 î Normal playback display Notes ! Y ou can per form title, chapter and time set- tings with either the information display 1 or 2. This manual explains how to use the infor- mation display 1 to per form title, chapter and time settings. ! P ressing DISPLA Y during fast for ward/reverse returns you to normal playback. Playing DVD video discs En 25 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (26,1) <CRB2123-A/U>26 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specif ying a title or chapter , and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select a desired option. The selected option is highlighted. 2 Press NUMBER to input the desired number . For titles and chapters ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 2 and 3 in order . î T o jump 10 titles or chapters ahead of the selected one, press 10. For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, press 2, 1, 4 and 3 in order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and press buttons 7, 1, 0 and 0 in order . î T o jump 10 seconds ahead of the se- lected time, press 10. # P ressing CLEAR cancels the input number . # Y ou can also select titles and chapters by mov- ing the joystick up or down. # Y ou cannot select titles and chapters by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. In this case, use the joystick to select titles and chapters. 3 While the input number is displayed, click the joystick. This starts playback from the selected scene. Notes ! With discs featuring a menu, you can also press MENU or TOP MENU (TOP .M) and then make selections from the displayed menu. ! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played, indicating that titles, chapters and time cannot be specified. ! Chapter search and time search are not possi- ble when disc playback has been stopped. ! Even without using an information display you can start playback from a specified title or chapter . For details, refer to Specifying title on page 22 and Specifying chapter on page 22. Selecting audio, subtitle and angle Y ou can per form audio (language, stereo, audio type as Dolby Digital etc.), subtitle lan- guage and angle selection. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select a desired option. The selected option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. For Audio Selection options switch as follows: Audio 1 î Audio 2 î Audio 3 For Subtitles Selection options switch as follows: Subtitles 1 î Subtitles 2 î Subtitles 3 For Angle Selection options switch as follows: Angle 1 î Angle 2 î Angle 3 Notes ! The number of switching options depends on how many options are recorded on the DVD. ! Y ou can switch audio, subtitle and angle dur- ing playback using the respective buttons. Playing DVD video discs En 26 Section 06
Black plate (27,1) <CRB2123-A/U>27 ! Y ou can also switch settings by inputting numbers with NUMBER. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. Selecting repeat range Y ou can choose between repeat play of a disc, title or chapter . 1 Press DISPLA Y to switch to the informa- tion display 2. 2 Move the joystick left or right to select the repeat range option. The repeat range option is highlighted. 3 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! Disc î Repeat the current disc ! Title î Repeat just the current title ! Chapter î Repeat just the current chapter Note Certain DVD discs display a menu upon comple- tion of repeat playback. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. 1 Press DISPLA Y to switch to the informa- tion display 2. 2 Move the joystick left or right to select the audio option. The audio option is highlighted. 3 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! L R î Left and right ! L î Lef t ! R î Right Note This function is possible only with Linear PCM sound. Playing DVD video discs En 27 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (28,1) <CRB2123-A/U>28 Operating from the function display 1 1 1 2 The following functions can also be operated from the head unit îÂÂs display. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent chapter . % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î P AUSE (pause) ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the DVD playback : DSC (disc repeat), CHP (chapter re- peat), and TTL (title repeat). 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . 2 During DVD playback, press m or n to select the repeat range. P ress m or n until the desired repeat range appears in the display. ! DSC î Repeat the current disc ! TTL î Repeat just the current title ! CHP î Repeat just the current chapter Notes ! If you per form chapter search or fast forward/ reverse during CHP, the repeat play range changes to DSC. ! Y ou cannot operate repeating play when DVD AUTO PLA Y is on (refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 78). Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Playing DVD video discs En 28 Section 06
Black plate (29,1) <CRB2123-A/U>29 W atching a Video CD 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Head unit îÂÂs display 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Information display These are the basic steps necessar y to play a Video CD with your DVD player . More ad- vanced Video CD operation is explained start- ing on page 31. 1 VCD indicator Shows when a Video CD is playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. Basic operation of Video CD 1 Press NUMBER to select the desired menu option. When a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function starts playing, a menu is dis- played. ! Playback starts from the selected menu item. ! When the menu is two or more pages long, press o or p to switch between dis- plays. # Y ou can display the menu by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. # Operation with the joystick is not possible. # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the color of the icon m/ n changes from white to blue. When this happens, fast re- verse/fast for ward continues even if you release m or n . T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next track. Pressing o once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Using NUMBER also per forms the same op- eration. For more details, refer to Specifying track on the next page. Playing Video CDs En 29 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (30,1) <CRB2123-A/U>30 # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 4 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop Video CD playback by pressing g , that location on the disc is memorized en- abling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Specifying track T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired track number during playback. T rack number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected track. ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10, 10 and 3 in that order . Notes ! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played and operation may not be possible. ! With Video CD, direct search is not possible during PBC playback. Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play. Notes ! After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight seconds, the mode is automatically can- celed. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function cannot be op- erated. Pausing Video CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Playing Video CDs En 30 Section 07
Black plate (31,1) <CRB2123-A/U>31 Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Press r and hold during playback. The icon î î is displayed, forward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . 2 Press r or q to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press r or q it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 î 1/8 î 1/4 î 1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. Operating from the information display 1 This display lets you use the search function to specif y a track to search for desired scenes, use the time search function to specify a time to search for a desired scene, switch audio output, and select the range for repeat play. During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PLA YBACK CONTROL ON is displayed. During such playback, search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play. (Refer to Selecting repeat range on the next page.) ! PBC playback of Video-CD cannot be can- celled. 1 Information display Shows the function status. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display î Normal playback display Playing Video CDs En 31 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (32,1) <CRB2123-A/U>32 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specif ying a track, and the time search function to specif y the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. ! T rack search and time search are not possi- ble when disc playback has been stopped. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select a desired option. The selected option is highlighted. 2 Press NUMBER to input the desired number . For tracks ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 2 and 3 in order . î T o jump 10 tracks ahead of the selected one, press 10. For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, press 2, 1, 4 and 3 in order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and press buttons 7, 1, 0 and 0 in order . î T o jump 10 seconds ahead of the se- lected time, press 10. # P ressing CLEAR cancels the input number . # Y ou can also select tracks by moving the joy- stick up or down. # Y ou cannot select tracks by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. In this case, use the joystick to select tracks. 3 While the input number is displayed, click the joystick. This starts playback from the selected scene. Notes ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. ! Even without using an information display you can start playback from a specified track. For details, refer to Specifying track on page 30. Selecting repeat range Y ou can choose between repeat play of a disc or a track. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the repeat range option. The repeat range option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! Disc î Repeat the current disc ! T rack î Repeat just the current track Notes ! When repeat play of a Video CD disc is se- lected, a menu may be displayed after play- back depending on the disc. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function cannot be op- erated. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the audio option. The audio option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! L R î Left and right ! L î Lef t ! R î Right Playing Video CDs En 32 Section 07
Black plate (33,1) <CRB2123-A/U>33 Operating from the function display 1 1 1 2 2 2 Repeat and pause functions can also be oper- ated from the head unit îÂÂs display . 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î P AUSE (pause) ! During PBC (Playback Control) playback, you cannot select RPT. ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play Repeat play lets you play the same track over again. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn repeat play on. RPT :ON appears in the display . The track cur- rently playing will play to the end and then re- peat. 3 Press q to turn repeat play off. RPT :OFF appears in the display . The track cur- rently playing will continue to play and then play the next track. Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Playing Video CDs En 33 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (34,1) <CRB2123-A/U>34 Listening to a CD 1 1 1 3 2 2 Head unit îÂÂs display 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Information display These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your DVD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 CD indicator Shows when a CD is playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. Basic operation of CD 1 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you select ROUGH, pressing and holding m or n enables you to search ever y 10 tracks in the current disc. (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 38.) 2 T o skip back or forward to another track, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next track. Pressing o once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 3 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop CD playback by pressing g, that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play. Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. Playing CDs En 34 Section 08
Black plate (35,1) <CRB2123-A/U>35 Operating from the information display 1 1 1 This display lets you use the search function to specif y a track to search for desired track, select the range for repat play , and switch ran- dom play and scan play on or off . 1 Information display Shows the function status. Searching for a desired track Y ou can use the search function to specify a track to search for a desired track. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the track option. The track option is highlighted. 2 Press NUMBER to input the desired number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 2 and 3 in order . î T o jump 10 tracks ahead of the selected one, press 10. # P ressing CLEAR cancels the input number . # Y ou can also select tracks by moving the joy- stick up or down. # Y ou cannot select tracks by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. In this case, use the joystick to select tracks. 3 While the input number is displayed, click the joystick. Play of the selected track starts. Selecting repeat range Y ou can choose between repeat play of a disc or a track. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the repeat range option. The repeat range option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! Disc î Repeat the current disc ! T rack î Repeat just the current track Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Setting random play Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the random option. The random option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! ON î T racks will play in a random order ! OFF î T racks will continue to play in order Setting scan play Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the scan option. The scan option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! ON î The first 10 seconds of each track is played ! OFF î T racks will continue to play Playing CDs En 35 Section 08 Playing CDs
Black plate (36,1) <CRB2123-A/U>36 3 When you find the desired track, move the joystick up or down to cancel the scan play . Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal play- back of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display î Disc Title (disc title display) î Disc Artist (disc artist name display) î T rack Title (track title display) î T rack Artist (track artist name display) ! If specific information has not been re- corded on a CD TEXT disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No T rack Title ). ! Some characters may not be displayed properly . Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL , ART NAME , TRK TTL and ART NAME . When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the dis- play . Playing CDs En 36 Section 08
Black plate (37,1) <CRB2123-A/U>37 Operating from the function display 1 1 1 2 2 2 The following functions can also be operated from the head unit îÂÂs display. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î RDM (random play) î SCAN (scan play)î P AUSE (pause) î FF/REV (search method) ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn repeat play on. RPT :ON appears in the display . The track cur- rently playing will play to the end and then re- peat. 3 Press q to turn repeat play off. RPT :OFF appears in the display . The track cur- rently playing will continue to play and then play the next track. Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . 1 Press F to select RDM. P ress F until RDM appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn random play on. RDM :ON appears in the display. T racks will play in a random order . 3 Press q to turn random play off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. T racks will continue to play in order . Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press F to select SCAN. P ress F until SCAN appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. Playing CDs En 37 Section 08 Playing CDs
Black plate (38,1) <CRB2123-A/U>38 3 When you find the desired track press q to tur n scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track will continue to play . # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display , select SCAN again by press- ing F. Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal play- back of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Selecting the search method Y ou can switch the search method between fast for ward/reverse and searching ever y 10 tracks. 1 Press F to select FF/REV. P ress F until FF/REV appears in the display . # If the search method ROUGH has been pre- viously selected, ROUGH will be displayed. 2 Press m or n to select the search method. P ress m or n until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV î F ast for ward and reverse ! ROUGH î Searching ever y 10 tracks Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Entering disc titles Use the disc title input feature to store up to 48 CD titles in the unit. Each title can be up to 8 characters long. 1 Play the CD that you want to enter a title for . 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display . # When playing a CD TEXT disc, you cannot switch to TITLE IN. The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 3 Press r or q to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of r will display a letter of the al- phabet in A B C ... X Y Z, numbers and sym- bols in 1 2 3 ... > [ ] order . Each press of q will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 4 Press n to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, press n to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . P ress m to move backwards in the display . 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing n after entering the title. When you press n one more time, the en- tered title is stored in memor y . Playing CDs En 38 Section 08
Black plate (39,1) <CRB2123-A/U>39 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! Titles remain in memory, even af ter the disc has been removed from the unit, and are re- called when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Displaying disc titles Y ou can display the text information of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play time î DISC TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the cur- rently playing disc is shown in the display. # When a CD with a disc title is inserted, the disc title automatically begins to scroll through the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO D-TTL is displayed. Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play time î DISC TTL (disc title) î ART NAME (disc artist name) î TRK TTL (track title) î ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T -TTL ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL , ART NAME , TRK TTL and ART NAME . When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the dis- play . Playing CDs En 39 Section 08 Playing CDs
Black plate (40,1) <CRB2123-A/U>40 Listening to MP3/WMA 1 1 1 3 4 4 4 2 Head unit îÂÂs display 4 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 5 5 5 When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Information display These are the basic steps necessary to play an MP3/WMA with your DVD player . More ad- vanced MP3/WMA operation is explained starting on page 42. 1 MP3/WMA indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the number of folder currently play- ing. ! On the head unit îÂÂs display , if the folder number is more than 100, F in the folder number indicator disappears. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. ! If the play time is more than 100 minutes, only the last two digits of play time (min- ute) is displayed on the head unit îÂÂs dis- play . 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. ! If a track number 100 to 199 is selected, d will light up above the last two digits of the track number . ! If a track number 200 or more is selected, d will blink above the last two digits of the track number . 5 ROM indicator Shows when the MP3/WMA file is playing. When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD -EXTRA and MIXED -MODE CDs, CD/ROM is dis- played. Basic operation of MP3/WMA 1 Press r or q to select a folder . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3/WMA file recorded in it. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you select ROUGH, pressing and holding m or n enables you to search ever y 10 tracks in the current folder . (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 45.) 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next track. Pressing o once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Playing MP3/WMA En 40 Section 09
Black plate (41,1) <CRB2123-A/U>41 # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 4 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop MP3/WMA playback by press- ing g, that location on the disc is memorized en- abling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD- DA with BAND. ! If you have switched between playback of MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA), play- back starts at the first track on the disc. ! This DVD player can play back an MP3/WMA file recorded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 91 for files that can be played back.) ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up CD playback and the sound being issued. When being read in, FRMTREAD is displayed. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). ! If the inserted disc contains no files that can be played back, NON-PLA Y is displayed. ! There is no sound on fast forward or reverse. ! If the inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digital rights management (DRM) , SKIPPED is displayed while the pro- tected file is skipped. ! If all the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM, PROTECT is displayed. ! When an MP3/WMA disc is inserted, folder name and file name begin to scroll to the left automatically . Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play. Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. Playing MP3/WMA En 41 Section 09 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (42,1) <CRB2123-A/U>42 Operating from the information display 1 1 1 This display lets you use the search function to specif y a track or a folder to search for de- sired track or folder , select the range for repeat play , and switch random play , scan play and pause playback on or off . 1 Information display Shows the function status. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display î Folder Name (folder name display) î File Name (file name display) î T rack Title (track title display) î Artist Name (artist name display) î Album Title (album title display) î Comment (comment display)î Bit Rate (bit rate display) ! When playing back WMA files, album title and comment are not displayed. ! When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not displayed even af ter switching to bit rate. ( VBR will be displayed.) ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). ! If specific information has not been re- corded on an MP3/WMA disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No T rack Title ). ! Some characters may not be displayed properly . Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of FOLDER , FILE , TRK TTL , ART NAME , ALBM TTL , COMMENT and Bit Rate . When the recorded information is longer than 8 let- ters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the text information can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display . Searching for a desired folder or track Y ou can use the search function to specify a track to search for a desired folder or track. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select a desired option. The selected option is highlighted. 2 Press NUMBER to input the desired number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 2 and 3 in order . î T o jump 10 folders or 10 tracks ahead of the selected one, press 10. # P ressing CLEAR cancels the input number . # Y ou can also select folders or tracks by mov- ing the joystick up or down. # Y ou cannot select folders or tracks by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. In this case, use the joystick to select folders or tracks. Playing MP3/WMA En 42 Section 09
Black plate (43,1) <CRB2123-A/U>43 3 While the input number is displayed, click the joystick. Play of the selected folder or track starts. Selecting repeat range F or MP3/WMA playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat), T rack (one-track repeat) and Disc (repeat all tracks). 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the repeat range option. The repeat range option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! Folder î Repeat the current folder ! Disc î Repeat the current disc ! T rack î Repeat just the current track Notes ! If you select other folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to Disc. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during T rack , the repeat play range changes to Folder. ! When Folder is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if Disc is selected. Setting random play Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, Folder and Disc. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the random option. The random option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! ON î T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected Folder or Disc ranges ! OFF î T racks will continue to play in order Setting scan play While you are using Folder, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using Disc , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the scan option. The scan option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! ON î The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played ! OFF î T racks will continue to play 3 When you find the desired track, move the joystick up or down to cancel the scan play . Note After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Playing MP3/WMA En 43 Section 09 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (44,1) <CRB2123-A/U>44 Operating from the function display 1 1 1 2 2 2 The following functions can also be operated from the head unit îÂÂs display. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î RDM (random play) î SCAN (scan play)î P AUSE (pause) î FF/REV (search method) ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play F or MP3/WMA playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: FLD (folder repeat), TRK (one-track repeat) and DSC (repeat all tracks). 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the repeat range. P ress m or n until the desired repeat range appears in the display. ! FLD î Repeat the current folder ! TRK î Repeat just the current track ! DSC î Repeat all tracks Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DSC. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK, the repeat play range changes to FLD. ! When FLD is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if DSC is selected. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FLD and DSC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press F to select RDM. P ress F until RDM appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn random play on. RDM :ON appears in the display. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected FLD or DSC ranges. 4 Press q to turn random play off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. T racks will continue to play in order . Playing MP3/WMA En 44 Section 09
Black plate (45,1) <CRB2123-A/U>45 Note If you turn random play on during FLD and then return to the playback display , FRDM appears in the display. Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FLD, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using DSC , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press F to select SCAN. P ress F until SCAN appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or folder) press q to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track (or folder) will continue to play. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display , select SCAN again by press- ing F. Notes ! After track or folder scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! If you turn scan play on during FLD and then return to the playback display , FSCN appears in the display . Pausing MP3/WMA playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Selecting the search method Y ou can switch the search method between fast for ward/reverse and searching ever y 10 tracks. 1 Press F to select FF/REV. P ress F until FF/REV appears in the display . # If the search method ROUGH has been pre- viously selected, ROUGH will be displayed. 2 Press m or n to select the search method. P ress m or n until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV î F ast for ward and reverse ! ROUGH î Searching ever y 10 tracks Searching every 10 tracks in the current folder If the current folder contains over 10 tracks, you can search ever y 10 tracks. When one folder contains a lot of tracks, you can roughly search for the track you want to play. 1 Select the search method ROUGH. Refer to Selecting the sear ch method on this page. Playing MP3/WMA En 45 Section 09 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (46,1) <CRB2123-A/U>46 2 Press and hold m or n to search every 10 tracks in the current folder . # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding n recalls the last track of the folder . Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching ever y 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding n recalls the last track of the folder . # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding m recalls the first track of the folder . Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching ever y 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding m recalls the first track of the folder . Displaying text information on MP3/WMA disc T ext information recorded on a MP3/WMA disc can be displayed. % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play time î FOLDER (folder name) î FILE (file name) î TRK TTL (track title) î ART NAME (ar- tist name) î ALBM TTL (album title) î COMMENT (comment)î Bit rate # When playing back WMA files, album title and comment are not displayed. # When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not dis- played even after switching to bit rate. ( VBR will be displayed.) # This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA disc, NO XXXX will be dis- played (e.g., NO NAME). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of FOLDER , FILE , TRK TTL , ART NAME , ALBM TTL and COMMENT . When the re- corded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the text information can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the text information begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the text informatio n will appear in the display . Playing MP3/WMA En 46 Section 09
Black plate (47,1) <CRB2123-A/U>47 Playing a CD 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 Y ou can use this unit to control a multi-CD player , which is sold separately . These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your multi-CD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press SOURCE to select the multi-CD player . P ress SOURCE until you see MUL TI CD dis- played. 2 Select a disc you want to listen to with the NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) buttons. F or discs 1 to 6, press the corresponding but- ton number . F or discs 7 to 12, press and hold the corre- sponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the display . # Y ou can also sequentially select a disc by pressing r or q. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, press m or n. P ressing m skips to the start of the next track. Pressing n once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- paratory operations, READY is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to the multi-CD player owner îÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. ! When you select a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player , the disc and track titles begin to scroll to the lef t auto - matically . Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play. Multi-CD Player En 47 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (48,1) <CRB2123-A/U>48 Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. 50-disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported by 50-disc multi- CD players. This unit is not designed to operate disc title list functions with a 50-disc multi-CD player . About the disc title list functions, please refer to Selecting discs from the disc title list on page 52. Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î LIST (disc title list) î RDM (random play) î SCAN (scan play) î ITS-P (ITS play) î P AUSE (pause) î COMP (compression and DBE) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: MCD (multi-CD player re- peat), TRK (one-track repeat) and DSC (disc re- peat). 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . Multi-CD Player En 48 Section 10
Black plate (49,1) <CRB2123-A/U>49 2 Press m or n to select the repeat range. P ress m or n until the desired repeat range appears in the display. ! MCD î Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRK î Repeat just the current track ! DSC î Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to MCD. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK, the repeat play range changes to DSC. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in ran- dom order within the repeat range, MCD and DSC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press F to select RDM. P ress F until RDM appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn random play on. RDM :ON appears in the display. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. 4 Press q to turn random play off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. T racks will continue to play in order . Note If you turn random play on during DSC and then return to the playback display , DRDM appears in the display. Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DSC, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using MCD, the be- ginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press F to select SCAN. P ress F until SCAN appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or disc) press q to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track (or disc) will continue to play . # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display , select SCAN again by press- ing F. Notes ! After track or disc scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! If you turn scan play on during DSC and then return to the playback display , DSCN appears in the display . Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. Multi-CD Player En 49 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (50,1) <CRB2123-A/U>50 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Note P ress f on the remote control repeatedly dur- ing playback to turn pause on or off . Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. Af ter you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc from up to 100 discs (with the disc titles). (With multi-CD players sold be- fore the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. P ress r or q to select a CD. 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press F to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press F repeatedly , the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input) î ITS (ITS program- ming) 3 Select a desired track by pressing m or n. 4 Press r to store the currently playing track in the playlist. ITS IN is displayed briefly and the currently playing selection is added to your playlist. The display then shows ITS again. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in mem- or y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play , tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-CD player will begin to play . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 48. 2 Press F to select ITS-P. P ress F until ITS-P appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn ITS play on. ITS-P:ON appears in the display. Playback be- gins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play , then EMPTY is displayed. 4 Press q to turn ITS play off. ITS-P:OFF appears in the display. Playback will continue in normal order from the currently playing track and CD. Multi-CD Player En 50 Section 10
Black plate (51,1) <CRB2123-A/U>51 Erasing a track from your ITS playlist T o delete a track from your ITS playlist, make sure ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. 1 Play the CD that contains the track you want to delete from your ITS playlist and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press F to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press F until ITS appears in the display . 3 Select a desired track by pressing m or n. 4 Press q to erase the track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, EMPTY is displayed and normal play resumes. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist T o delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS play- list, make sure ITS play is off . 1 Play the CD that you want to delete. P ress r or q to select a CD. 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press F to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press F until ITS appears in the display . 3 Press q to erase all tracks on the cur - rently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ITS CLR is dis- played. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the titles. Then you can easily search for and play a de- sired disc. Entering disc titles Use the disc title input feature to store up to 100 CD titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi- CD player . Each title can be up to 8 characters long. 1 Play the CD with the title you want to enter . P ress r or q to select a CD. 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display . After TITLE IN is displayed, press F repeatedly , the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input) î ITS (ITS program- ming) # When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player , you cannot switch to TITLE IN . The disc title will have already been re- corded on a CD TEXT disc. Multi-CD Player En 51 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (52,1) <CRB2123-A/U>52 3 Press r or q to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of r will display a letter of the al- phabet in A B C ... X Y Z, numbers and sym- bols in 1 2 3 ... > [ ] order . Each press of q will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 4 Press n to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, press n to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . P ress m to move backwards in the display . 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing n after entering the title. When you press n one more time, the en- tered title is stored in memor y . 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! Titles remain in memory, even af ter the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Displaying disc titles Y ou can display the text information of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play time î DISC TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the cur- rently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO D-TTL is displayed. Selecting discs from the disc title list Disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles that have been entered into the multi-CD player and lets you select one for playback. 1 Press F to select LIST. P ress F until LIST appears in the display. 2 Press m or n to scroll through the list of titles that have been entered. # If no title has been entered for a disc, title is not displayed. 3 Press r to play your favorite CD title. That selection will begin to play . Using CD TEXT functions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Multi-CD Player En 52 Section 10
Black plate (53,1) <CRB2123-A/U>53 Play time î DISC TTL (disc title) î ART NAME (disc artist name) î TRK TTL (track title) î ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T -TTL ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL , ART NAME , TRK TTL and ART NAME . When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the dis- play . Using compression and dynamic bass emphasis Y ou can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dy- namic bass emphasis) functions lets you ad- just the sound playback quality of the multi- CD player . Each of the functions has a two- step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at high- er volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. 1 Press F to select COMP. P ress F until COMP appears in the display. # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed when you at- tempt to select it. 2 Press r or q to select your favorite setting. P ress r or q repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFF î COMP 1 î COMP 2 î COMP OFF î DBE 1 î DBE 2 Multi-CD Player En 53 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (54,1) <CRB2123-A/U>54 Introduction of audio adjustments 1 1 4 7 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 6 6 6 1 Preset equalizer indicator Shows which equalizer preset is currently selected. When CUSTOM is selected, equalizer cur ve does not display . 2 SFEQ indicator Appears in the display when SFEQ function can be activated. 3 EQ-EX indicator Appears in the display when EQ-EX function can be activated. 4 CUSTOM indicator Shows when custom equalizer curve is cur- rently selected. 5 Loudness indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. 6 SW indicator Shows when the subwoofer output is turned on. 7 Audio display Shows the audio adjustments status. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, the audio function will be changed to the multi-channel processor îÂÂs audio menu. For details, refer to Introduction of DSP ad- justments on page 61. % Press A to display the audio function names. P ress A repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing audio functions: FAD (balance adjustment) î EQ (equalizer cur ve adjustment) î B (bass and treble level adjustment) î LOUD (loudness) î SUB, W (subwoofer on/off setting)/ NOF AD (non fading output on/off setting) î 80: 0 (subwoofer set- ting)/ NOFAD (non fading output setting) î HPF (high pass filter)î SLA (source level ad- justment) # When SFEQ function has been selected or when EQ-EX is turned on and CUSTOM is se- lected as the equalizer cur ve, you can switch to B . # When the rear output and subwoofer control- ler setting is either R-SP :FUL and P/O :S/W or R-SP :S/W , you can switch to SUB, W . (Refer to page 81.) # Y ou can select the 80: 0 only when subwoofer output is turned on in SUB, W. # When the rear output and subwoofer control- ler setting is only R-SP :FUL and P/O :FUL, you can switch to the nonfading output on/off setting. (Refer to page 81.) # Y ou can select the nonfading output setting only when nonfading output is turned on in the nonfading output on/off setting. # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA. # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display . Audio Adjustments En 54 Section 11
Black plate (55,1) <CRB2123-A/U>55 Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. There are six stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL Powerful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal CUSTOM Custom EQ FLA T Flat SPR-BASS Super bass ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer cur ve that you create. ! A separate CUSTOM cur ve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments, the equalizer cur ve settings will be memor- ized in CUSTOM. ! When EQ FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between EQ FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL î NA TURAL î VOCAL î CUSTOM î EQ FLA T î SPR-BASS Compensating for equalizer curves (EQ-EX) The EQ-EX function accentuates the effects of each equalizer curve. F urthermore, you can adjust bass and treble for each source when CUSTOM cur ve is selected. ! If SFEQ has been previously selected, press EQ-EX and hold to switch to EQ-EX and EQ-EX appears in the display. ! Y ou cannot use EQ-EX function and SFEQ function simultaneously. % Press EQ-EX to turn EQ-EX on. EQ-EX:ON appears in the display. EQ-EX is now on. # T o turn EQ-EX off , press EQ-EX. Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) Clarifying the sound image of vocals and in- struments allows the simple staging of a nat- ural, pleasant sound environment. Even greater listening enjoyment will be obtained if seating positions are chosen carefully . FRT1 boosts the treble on the front output and the bass on the rear output. FRT2 boosts the treble and the bass on the front output and the bass on the rear output. (The bass boost is the same for both front and rear .) F or both FRT1 and FRT2, H setting provides a more pro- nounced effect than L setting. ! Y ou cannot use EQ-EX function and SFEQ function simultaneously. 1 Press EQ-EX and hold to switch to SFEQ function. P ress EQ-EX and hold until SFEQ indicator ap- pears in the display . # T o switch to EQ-EX function, press EQ-EX and hold. 2 Press EQ-EX to select the desired SFEQ setting. P ress EQ-EX repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Audio Adjustments En 55 Section 11 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (56,1) <CRB2123-A/U>56 FRT1-H (front 1-high) î FRT1-L (front 1-low) î FRT2-H (front 2-high)î FRT2-L (front 2-low) î CUSTOM (custom)î SFEQ OFF (off) 3 Press m or n to select the desired position. P ress m or n until the desired position ap- pears in the display . L (left) î C (center) î R (right) Notes ! If you adjust the bass or treble, CUSTOM memorizes an SFEQ setting in which the bass and treble are adjusted for personal prefer- ence. ! If you switch the SFEQ setting, the HPF func- tion is automatically turned off . By turning the HPF function on after selecting the SFEQ set- ting, you can combine HPF function with SFEQ function. Using balance adjustment Y ou can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press A to select FAD. P ress A until FAD appears in the display . # If the balance setting has been previously ad- justed, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press r or q to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of r or q moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FAD :F15 î F AD :R15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FAD : 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # When the rear output setting is R-SP :S/W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 81. 3 Press m or n to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press m or n, BAL : 0 is dis- played. Each press of m or n moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL : L 9 î BAL : R 9 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Adjusting equalizer curves Y ou can adjust the currently selected equalizer cur ve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer cur ve settings are memorized in CUSTOM. 1 Press A to select EQ. P ress A until EQ appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each press of m or n selects equalizer bands in the following order: EQ-L (low) î EQ-M (mid) î EQ-H (high) 3 Press r or q to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the level of the equalization band. 6 î îÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. Note If you make adjustments, CUSTOM curve is up- dated. Audio Adjustments En 56 Section 11
Black plate (57,1) <CRB2123-A/U>57 Fine-adjusting equalizer curve Y ou can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (cur ve characteristics) of each currently selected cur ve band ( EQ-L/ EQ-M/ EQ-H). Level (dB) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W F requency (Hz) 1 Press A and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display . 2 Press A to select the band for adjust- ment from among low , mid and high. P ress A repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: Low î Mid î High î B (bass adjustment) î T (treble adjustment) # If EQ-EX function has been selected and only when EQ-EX is turned on and CUSTOM is se- lected as the equalizer cur ve, you can switch to B and T. 3 Press m or n to select the desired frequency . P ress m or n until the desired frequency appears in the display . Low : 40 î 80 î 100 î 160 (Hz) Mid: 200 î 500 î 1k î 2k (Hz) High: 3k î 8k î 10k î 12k (Hz) 4 Press r or q to select the desired Q factor . P ress r or q until the desired Q factor ap- pears in the display . 2N î 1N î 1W î 2W Note If you make adjustments, CUSTOM curve is up- dated. Adjusting bass and treble Y ou can adjust bass and treble settings. ! If EQ-EX function has been selected and EQ-EX turned on and CUSTOM selected as the equalizer cur ve, you can adjust bass and treble settings. ! If SFEQ has been set to FRT1, bass adjust- ment affects only the rear output: front out- put cannot be adjusted. ! If SFEQ has been set to FRT1 or FRT2 , tre- ble adjustment affects only the front out- put: rear output cannot be adjusted. Adjusting bass and treble level Y ou can adjust the bass and treble level. 1 Press A to select B. P ress A until B appears in the display. # If the treble level has been previously ad- justed, T will be displayed. 2 Press m or n to select bass or treble. P ress m and B is displayed. P ress n and T is displayed. 3 Press r or q to adjust the level. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the selected bass or treble level. 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. Audio Adjustments En 57 Section 11 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (58,1) <CRB2123-A/U>58 Selecting bass frequency Y ou can select the bass frequency for level ad- justment. 1 Press A and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display . 2 Press A to select B. P ress A until B appears in the display. 3 Press m or n to select the desired frequency . P ress m or n until the desired frequency appears in the display . 40 î 63 î 100 î 160 (Hz) Selecting treble frequency Y ou can select the treble frequency for level adjustment. 1 Press A and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display . 2 Press A to select T. P ress A until T appears in the display . 3 Press m or n to select the desired frequency . P ress m or n until the desired frequency appears in the display . 2k î 4k î 6k î 10k (Hz) Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press A to select LOUD. P ress A until LOUD appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn loudness on. Loudness level (e.g., LOUD :MID) appears in the display . 3 Press m or n to select a desired level. Each press of m or n selects level in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HI (high) 4 Press q to turn loudness off. LOUD :OFF appears in the display. Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . 1 Press A to select SUB, W. P ress A until SUB, W appears in the display . # When the rear output and subwoofer control- ler setting is either R-SP :FUL and P/O :S/W or R-SP :S/W , you can switch to SUB, W . (Refer to page 81.) 2 Press r to turn subwoofer output on. SUB, W:NOR appears in the display . Subwoo - fer output is now on. # If the subwoofer output phase has been set to the reverse, SUB, W:REV will be displayed. # T o turn subwoofer output off , press q. 3 Press m or n to select the phase of subwoofer output. P ress m to select reverse phase and REV ap- pears in the display . P ress n to select nor- mal phase and NOR appears in the display. Adjusting subwoofer settings When the subwoofer output is on, you can ad- just the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . Audio Adjustments En 58 Section 11
Black plate (59,1) <CRB2123-A/U>59 1 Press A to select 80: 0. P ress A until 80: 0 appears in the display . # When the subwoofer output is on, you can se- lect 80: 0. # If the subwoofer setting has been previously adjusted, the frequency of that previously se- lected will be displayed instead of 80 . 2 Press m or n to select cut-off fre- quency . Each press of m or n selects cut- off fre- quencies in the following order: 50 î 80 î 125 (Hz) Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the subwoo- fer . 3 Press r or q to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the level of the subwoofer . 6 î îÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Using nonfading output When the nonfading output setting is on, the audio signal does not pass through this unit îÂÂs low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is out- putted through the RCA output. 1 Press A to select non fading output on/ off setting. P ress A until NOFAD:ON appears in the dis- play . # When the rear output and subwoofer control- ler setting is only R-SP :FUL and P/O :FUL, you can switch to the nonfading output on/off setting. (Refer to page 81.) 2 Press r to turn non fading output on. NOFAD:ON appears in the display . Nonfading output is now on. # T o turn non fading output off , press q. Adjusting nonfading output level When the nonfading output is on, you can ad- just the level of nonfading output. 1 Press A to select non fading output set- ting. P ress A until NOFAD: 0 appears in the dis- play . 2 Press r or q to adjust the output level of the non fading. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the level of the non fading. 6 î îÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. 1 Press A to select HPF. P ress A until HPF appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn high pass filter on. HPF : 80 appears in the display . High pass fil- ter is now on. # If the high pass filter has been previously ad- justed, the frequency of that previously selected will be displayed instead of HPF : 80 . # T o turn high pass filter off , press q. 3 Press m or n to select cut-off fre- quency . Each press of m or n selects cut- off fre- quencies in the following order: Audio Adjustments En 59 Section 11 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (60,1) <CRB2123-A/U>60 50 î 80 î 125 (Hz) Only frequencies higher than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. Note If you switch the SFEQ setting, the HPF function is automatically turned off . By turning the HPF function on af ter selecting the SFEQ setting, you can combine HPF function with SFEQ function. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 Press A to select SLA. P ress A until SLA appears in the display. 3 Press r or q to adjust the source vo- lume. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the source volume. SLA : 4 î SLA : îÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3/WMA are set to the same source level adjustment volume auto- matically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Audio Adjustments En 60 Section 11
Black plate (61,1) <CRB2123-A/U>61 Introduction of DSP adjustments Important F ollowing functions are effective only when you connected a Pioneer multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7650) to this unit. By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly . 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 A uto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cr oss-over frequency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Operating the DSP menu 1 2 2 2 1 DSP display Shows the DSP status. 2 Subwoofer indicator Shows when the subwoofer output is turned on. % Press A to display the DSP function names. P ress A repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing DSP functions: POSI (position selector) î FAD (balance ad- justment) î SLA (source level adjustment) î DRC (dynamic range control)î DIRCT (di- rect) î Lo/Ro (down mix) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA, DRC. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to DRC. # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Note If you do not operate the DSP function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display . Digital Signal Processor En 61 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (62,1) <CRB2123-A/U>62 Operating the DSP details menu 1 2 1 DSP display Shows the DSP status. 2 PL II indicator Shows when the Dolby Pro Logic II is turned on. % Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to display the DSP function names. After FRONT is displayed, press A repeatedly, the following DSP functions appear in the dis- play : FRONT (speaker setting) î HPF (cross-over fre- quency) î FRT -L (speaker output level) î T TONE (test tone)î INITIAL (time align- ment mode) î FL (time alignment adjustment) î AT E Q (auto-equalizer on/off)î PEQ (3-band parametric equalizer) # When neither F/L nor F/R is selected in POSI, you cannot switch to INITIAL or FL . # Y ou cannot select AT E Q if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live per formance. ! The acoustics of different per formance en- vironments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors and ceilings. At a live performance you hear music in three stages: direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections, or re- verberations. Those factors are progr amed into the SFC circuitr y to recreate the acous- tics of various per formance settings. % Press EQ-EX to select the desired SFC mode. P ress EQ-EX repeatedly to switch between the following mode: MUSICAL (musical) î DRAMA (drama) î ACTION (action)î JAZZ (jazz)î HALL (hall) î CLUB (club)î OFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL, DRAMA or ACTION), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ, HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II off . Digital Signal Processor En 62 Section 12
Black plate (63,1) <CRB2123-A/U>63 Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used in con- junction with the SFC, the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a pa- noramic sound that envelops you. 1 Press A to select POSI. P ress A until POSI appears in the display. 2 Press m/ n/ r/ q to select a listen- ing position. P ress one of these, m/ n/ r/ q, to select a listening position as listed in the table. Button Di splay Position m F/L F ront seat left n F/R F ront seat right r FRT F ront seats q ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, press the same button again. Note When you make adjustments for listening posi- tion, the speakers are automatically set for appro- priate output levels. Y ou can tailor them if you want as discussed under the heading of Adjust- ing the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using balance adjustment Y ou can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press A to select FAD. P ress A until FAD appears in the display . # If the balance setting has been previously ad- justed, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press r or q to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of r or q moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FAD :F25 î F AD :R25 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FAD : 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press m or n to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press m or n, BAL : 0 is dis- played. Each press of m or n moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL :L25 î BAL :R25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. Digital Signal Processor En 63 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (64,1) <CRB2123-A/U>64 2 Press A to select SLA. P ress A until SLA appears in the display. 3 Press r or q to adjust the source vo- lume. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the source volume. SLA : 4 î SLA : îÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3/WMA are set to the same source level adjustment volume auto- matically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and sof test sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. 1 Press A to select DRC. P ress A until DRC appears in the display. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. 2 Press r to turn the dynamic range control on. DRC :ON appears in the display. Dynamic range control is now on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , press q . Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. 1 Press A to select DIRCT. P ress A until DIRCT appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn the dir ect control on. DIRCT :ON appears in the display . Direct con- trol is now on. # T o turn direct control off , press q. Notes ! All audio functions are locked out during DIRCT :ON except VOLUME and PLII . ! If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2-channel Dolby Digital audio and you select DIRCT :ON , audio is heared only over front left/ right speakers. Using the down-mix function Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 1 Press A to select Lo/Ro. P ress A until Lo/Ro appears in the display. # If the down mix Lt/Rt has been previously se- lected, Lt/Rt will be displayed. Digital Signal Processor En 64 Section 12
Black plate (65,1) <CRB2123-A/U>65 2 Press m or n to switch the down mix settings. ! Lt/Rt î Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). ! Lo/Ro î Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! If both the center and the rear speakers are set to OFF, you cannot use this function. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. 1 Press and hold EQ-EX until PLII appears in the display . 2 Press EQ-EX to select the desired mode. ! MOV (movie) î The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUS (music) î The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA T (matrix) î The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! PLII :OFF î T urn Dolby Pro Logic II off # Y ou can adjust the music mode only when MUS (music) has been selected. # T o cancel Dolby Pro Logic II, press EQ-EX again to select PLII : OFF. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. ! P anorama ( P ANO ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting îÂÂwraparound î effect. ! Dimension ( DIME) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either towards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENT) allows center- channel sounds to be positioned between the center speaker and the left/right speak- ers. It improves the lef t-center-right stage presentation for both the driver and the front passenger . 1 Press EQ-EX until MUS (music) appears in the display . 2 Press n to select P ANO. P ress r or q to turn P ANO on/off . 3 Press n again to select DIME. Each time you press r or q it move s the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 î îÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/surround speaker balance moves from front to sur- rounds. 4 Press n again to select CENT. Each time you press r or q it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 îÂÂ7. 3 is the default and it îÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the left/right speakers. Digital Signal Processor En 65 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (66,1) <CRB2123-A/U>66 Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LRG (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SML (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SML or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF. ! Set the front or rear speaker to LRG if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) î CENT (center speak- er) î REAR (rear speakers) î SUB.W (subwoo- fer) î PHASE (subwoofer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON. 3 Press r or q to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each press of r or q selects the size in the following order: SML (small) î LRG (large) î OFF (off) # Y ou cannot select OFF, when FRONT (front speakers) have been selected. # Y ou can select ON or OFF , when SUB.W (sub- woofer) has been selected. # Y ou can switch REV (reverse phase) or NOR (normal phase), when PHASE (subwoofer setting) has been selected. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Correcting the subwoofer î s phase If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn îÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer îÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the subwoo- fer . Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) î CENT (center speak- er) î REAR (rear speakers) î SUB.W (subwoo- fer) î PHASE (subwoofer setting) 3 Press r to turn the subwoofer output on. 4 Press n to select PHASE (subwoofer setting). 5 Press r or q to select the subwoofer output phase. P ress r to select NOR (normal phase). Press q to select REV (reverse phase). 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic II turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: Digital Signal Processor En 66 Section 12
Black plate (67,1) <CRB2123-A/U>67 ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is SML or LRG and no center speaker is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SML or LRG . Selecting a cross-over frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo- fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SML, you can select a fre- quency , under which sounds are reproduced through a LRG speaker or subwoofer . 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select HPF. After FRONT is displayed, press A until HPF appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: F (front speakers) î C (center speaker) î R (rear speakers) î S (subwoofer) 3 Press r or q to select cross-over fre- quency for the selected speaker . Each press of r or q selects cross- over fre- quencies in the following order: 63 î 80 î 100 î 125 î 160 î 200 (Hz) 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross- over frequency of the subwoofer îÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SML speaker H.P .F . (high- pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LRG or OFF . Adjusting the speaker output levels Y ou can readjust the speaker output levels using a test tone while listening to music. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select FRT -L. After FRONT is displayed, press A until FRT -L appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: FRT -L (front speaker left) î CENT (center speaker) î FRT -R (front speaker right) î RER-R (rear speaker right) î RER-L (rear speaker left) î SUB.W (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF. 3 Press r or q to adjust the speaker output level. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 î îÂÂ10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at T TONE . Both provide the same results. Digital Signal Processor En 67 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (68,1) <CRB2123-A/U>68 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone A convenient test tone allows you to easily get the overall balance right among the speakers. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select T TONE. After FRONT is displayed, press A until T TONE appears in the display . 2 Press n to start the test tone output. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display. FRT -L (front speaker left) î CENT (center speaker) î FRT -R (front speaker right) î RER-R (rear speaker right) î RER-L (rear speaker left) î SUB.W (subwoofer) # Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 4 to stop the test tone. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF. 3 Press r or q to adjust the speaker output level. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 î îÂÂ10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 Press m to stop the test tone output. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their îÂÂab- solute î output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at FRT -L . Both provide the same re- sults. Using the time alignment Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select INITIAL. After FRONT is displayed, press A until INITIAL appears in the display. # Y ou cannot select INITIAL when neither F/L nor F/R is selected in POSI. 2 Press m or n to select the time alignment. ! INITIAL î Initial time alignment (factor y set- ting) ! CUSTOM î Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! AUTO T A î Time alignment created by auto T A and EQ. (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto- time alignment and auto-equalizing) on the next page.) ! T A :OFF î T urn the time alignment off # T o turn time alignment off , select T A :OFF . # Y ou cannot select AUTO T A if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 3 Press BAND to cancel the time align- ment mode. Digital Signal Processor En 68 Section 12
Black plate (69,1) <CRB2123-A/U>69 Adjusting the time alignment By adjusting the distance between each speaker and a selected listening position, you can insert delay times into the speaker output to obtain a correct sound image and overall level balance. Although this is automatically achieved when you set the listening position, the time alignment feature provides a fine ad- justment. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select FL. After FRONT is displayed, press A until FL ap- pears in the display . # Y ou cannot select FL when neither F/L nor F/R is selected in POSI. 2 Press m or n to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: FL (front speaker left) î C (center speaker) î FR (front speaker right) î RR (rear speaker right) î RL (rear speaker left)î SW (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF. 3 Press r or q to adjust the distance between the selected speaker and the lis- tening position. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the distance. 500.0 (cm) î 0.0 (cm) is displayed as the distance is increased or de- creased. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Using the auto-equalizer The auto -equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on this page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select A T EQ. After FRONT is displayed, press A until AT E Q appears in the display . # Y ou cannot use this function if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 2 Press r to turn the auto-equalizer on. A T EQ:ON appears in the display . # T o turn auto-equalizer off , press q. Auto T A an d EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The auto -time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto -equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto-equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto -equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto TA and EQ. Digital Signal Processor En 69 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (70,1) <CRB2123-A/U>70 î When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) î When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker îÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp îÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cross-over frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. î When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . î When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: î The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 63.) î The graphic equalizer cur ve switches to EQ FLA T . (Refer to page 72.) î When a subwoofer is connected to this unit, it will be adjusted automatically to both subwoofer output and high pass fil- ter setting for rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Digital Signal Processor En 70 Section 12
Black plate (71,1) <CRB2123-A/U>71 Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roo f, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver î s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carry out auto T A and EQ. 3 T urn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car îÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. # P ress SOURCE to turn the source on if this unit is turned off . 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 63. # If no position is selected before you start auto T A and EQ, F/L is selected automatically . 5 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 6 Press and hold EQ to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on the multi-channel pro- cessor . 8 Press r to start the auto T A and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speakers are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, press any keys. # T o cancel auto TA and EQ part way through, press BAND. 10 When auto T A and EQ is completed, COMPLETE is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ error messages on page 89.) 11 Press BAND to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. Digital Signal Processor En 71 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (72,1) <CRB2123-A/U>72 12 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or mal- function. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL P owerful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal EQ FLA T Flat CUSTOM1 Custom 1 CUSTOM2 Custom 2 SPR-BASS Super bass ! CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When EQ FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between EQ FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL î NA TURAL î VOCAL î EQ FLA T î CUSTOM1î CUSTOM2î SPR-BASS Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Fo r CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and cen- ter equalizer curves separately by selecting a center frequency , an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! A CUSTOM2 curve can be created com- mon to all sources. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn îÂÂt easy . W e recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other speakers. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select PEQ. After FRONT is displayed, press A until PEQ appears in the display . # Adjusted PEQ settings are memorized in CUSTOM1 . 2 Press r or q to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of r or q selects the speaker in the following order: FRT (front speakers) î CEN (center speaker) î RER (rear speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF. 3 Press n and then press r or q to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each press of r or q selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HI (high) Digital Signal Processor En 72 Section 12
Black plate (73,1) <CRB2123-A/U>73 4 Press n and then press r or q to select the center frequency of selected band. Each press of r or q selects the frequency in the following order: 40Hz î 50Hz î 63Hz î 80Hz î 100Hz î 125Hz î 160Hzî 200Hzî 250Hzî 315Hzî 400Hzî 500Hz î 630Hz î 800Hz î 1kHz î 1.2kHz î 1.6kHz î 2kHz î 2.5kHz î 3.1kHz î 4kHz î 5kHz î 6.3kHz î 8kHz î 10kHz î 12kHz 5 Press n and then press r or q to adjust the equalizer level. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the equalizer level. 6 î îÂÂ6 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. 6 Press n and then press r or q to select the desired Q factor . Each press r or q switches between the following Q factor: WID (wide) î NAR (narrow) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way. 7 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note Y ou can select a center frequency for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc- tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. Digital Signal Processor En 73 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (74,1) <CRB2123-A/U>74 Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 1 Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. This menu can be operated only by using the re- mote control. 1 SET -UP MENU Shows the setup menu status. 1 Press g. 2 Press MENU when the disc is stopped. SET -UP MENU is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to switch between LANG (language settings), PICT (picture settings) and GEN (general settings). Note If you press MENU during display of a SET -UP MENU , the SET -UP MENU is canceled and the unit returns to the previous display . Returning to the previous display The SET -UP MENU lets you switch between displays of different setting options. T o con- tinue per forming different settings, or if you make a mistake during setting, pressing RETURN takes you back to the previous dis- play each time you press it. Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select SUBTITLE LANG. in the SET -UP MENU (LANG.). SUBTITLE LANG. is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to select the desired language. The currently set language is indicated with the blue box. The language selected with the joystick is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. # T o return to the first language select menu, move the joystick left or right. 4 Click the joystick. A subtitle language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. Setting up the DVD player En 74 Section 13
Black plate (75,1) <CRB2123-A/U>75 ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language dur- ing playback with SUBTITLE (S.TITILE). (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 24.) ! Even if you use SUBTITLE (S.TITILE) to switch the subtitle language, this does not affect the settings here. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . When you select GENERAL When you select GENERAL, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 94, use the number but- tons to input the four digit code of the desired language, and then click the joystick. Note P ressing CLEAR cancels the input numbers. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select AUDIO LANG. in the SET -UP MENU (LANG.). AUDIO LANG. is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. An audio language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to select the desired audio language. The currently set language is indicated with the blue box. The language selected with the joystick is highlighted. # T o switch to the second audio language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. # T o return to the first audio language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. 4 Click the joystick. The audio language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language dur- ing playback with AUDIO. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 23.) ! Even if you use AUDIO to switch the audio language, this does not affect the settings here. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . ! If you have selected GENERAL, refer to When you select GENERAL on this page. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select MENU LANG. in the SET -UP MENU (LANG.). MENU LANG. is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. A menu language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to select the desired menu language. The currently set language is indicated with the blue box. The language selected with the joystick is highlighted. # T o switch to the second menu language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. # T o return to the first menu language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. Setting up the DVD player En 75 Section 13 Setting up the DVD player
Black plate (76,1) <CRB2123-A/U>76 4 Click the joystick. The menu language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . ! If you have selected GENERAL, refer to When you select GENERAL on the previous page. Setting assist subtitles on or off Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au- rally impaired. However , they are only dis- played if they are recorded on the DVD. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select ASSIST in the SET -UP MENU (LANG.). ASSIST is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. Each time you click the joystick the selected setting switches on or off . Setting angle icon display Y ou can set it up so that the angle icon ap- pears on scenes where the angle can be switched. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select ANGLE in the SET -UP MENU (PICT). ANGLE is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. Angle icon display is set on or off . Notes ! Y ou can also switch the angle during playback with ANGLE. (Refer to Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) on page 24.) ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display you use. ! When using a regular display, select either LETTER BOX or P ANSCAN . Selecting 16:9 may result in an unnatural picture. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select TV ASPECT in the SET -UP MENU (PICT). TV ASPECT is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. TV aspect menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to select the desired TV aspect. The currently set TV aspect is indicated with blue box. The TV aspect selected with the joy- stick is highlighted. ! 16:9 î Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX î The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P ANSCAN î The picture is cut short at the right and lef t of the screen Setting up the DVD player En 76 Section 13
Black plate (77,1) <CRB2123-A/U>77 4 Click the joystick. The selected TV aspect is set. Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P ANSCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P ANSCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 9.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc îÂÂs instruc- tions. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict the viewing of violent and adult- oriented scenes by children. Y ou can set the parental lock level in steps as desired. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level When you first use this function, register your code number . If you do not register a code number , parental lock will not operate. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select P ARENT AL in the SET -UP MENU (GEN). P ARENT AL is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. P arental lock setting menu is displayed. 3 Press NUMBER buttons to input a four digit code number . 4 Click the joystick. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 5 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired level. ! LEVEL 8 î Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 îÂÂLEVEL 2 î Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 î Playback of discs for children only is possible 6 Click the joystick. The parental lock level is set. Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Y ou can confirm it by looking at the disc pack- age, included literature or on the disc itself . With discs that do not feature a recorded par- ental lock level, you cannot use parental lock. ! With some discs, parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only , afte r which normal playback resumes. For details, refer to the disc îÂÂs instructions. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select P ARENT AL in the SET -UP MENU (GEN). P ARENT AL is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. P arental lock setting menu is displayed. Setting up the DVD player En 77 Section 13 Setting up the DVD player
Black plate (78,1) <CRB2123-A/U>78 3 Press NUMBER buttons to input the re- gistered code number . 4 Click the joystick. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. Press CLEAR and input the correct code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 5 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired level. 6 Click the joystick. The parental lock level is set. Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . If you forget your code number Refer to Changing the level on the previous page, and press CLEAR 10 times. The regis- tered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVDs disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select DVD AUTO PLA Y in the SET -UP MENU (GEN). DVD AUTO PLA Y is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick to tur n automatic playback on or off. # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on page 28). Setting remote control code type When the remote control operation switch is set to DVD, changing the remote control code type enables you to operate the P ioneer DVD player by the supplied remote control. There are three remote codes, code type A, code type B and code type DVH. When using this unit with a multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV -P9), se- lect code A. When using this unit only, select code DVH. ! With this unit, code B cannot be used. 1 Set the remote control selection switch on the left side of the remote control to the appropriate position with a pen tip or other pointed instrument . ! If you select DVH mode, there is no need to take the following procedure. ! If you select A/ B mode, take the following procedure and change the code type to the appropriate type. 2 Press 7 and 0 on the remote control si- multaneously to change the code type. Initially , the code type is set to A. Each time you press 7 and 0 simultaneously on the re- mote control the code type switches between A and B . Setting up the DVD player En 78 Section 13
Black plate (79,1) <CRB2123-A/U>79 Adjusting initial settings 1 Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press F and hold until function name appears in the display . 3 Press F to select one of the initial set- tings. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing settings: Clock î FM (FM tuning step) î AM (AM tuning step) î W ARN (warning tone) î AUX (auxiliar y setting) î DIMMR (dimmer) î R-SP (rear out- put and subwoofer controller) î TEL (tele- phone muting/attenuation) î DSC-A (disc auto) î D_A TT (digital attenuation) î A-RESET (audio reset) # T o cancel initial settings, press BAND. # Y ou can also cancel initial settings by holding down F until the unit turns off . # When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ- P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate D_A TT and A-RESET instead of R-SP . Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 Press F to select clock. P ress F repeatedly until clock appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. P ressing m or n will select one segment of the clock display: Hour î Minute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will blink. 3 Press r or q to set the clock. P ressing r will increase the selected hour or minute. Pressing q will decrease the se- lected hour or minute. Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. 1 Press F to select FM. P ress F repeatedly until FM appears in the dis- play . 2 Press m or n to select the FM tuning step. P ressing m or n will switch the FM tuning step between 100 kHz and 50 kHz. The se- lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis- play . Initial Settings En 79 Section 14 Initial Settings
Black plate (80,1) <CRB2123-A/U>80 Note If seek tuning is per formed in 50 kHz steps, sta- tions may be tuned in imprecisely . T une in the sta- tions with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 î 1 602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 î 1 640 kHz allowable). 1 Press F to select AM. P ress F repeatedly until AM appears in the dis- play . 2 Press m or n to select the AM tun- ing step. P ressing m or n will switch the AM tuning step between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display. Switching the warning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. 1 Press F to select W ARN. P ress F repeatedly until WARN appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn war ning tone on. W ARN :ON appears in the display. # T o turn warning tone off , press q. Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with this unit. Activate the auxiliar y setting when using auxiliar y equipment connected to this unit. 1 Press F to select AUX. P ress F repeatedly until AUX appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn auxiliary setting on. AUX :ON appears in the display. # T o turn auxiliar y setting off , press q. Note When this unit is connected to the DEQ-P7650, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or di- gital. However , when you use AUX as the source, make sure the AUX mode is set to analog. AUX digital should not be used with this unit. Switching the dimmer setting T o prevent the display from being too bright at night, the display is automatically dimmed when the car îÂÂs headlights are turned on. Y ou can turn the dimmer on or off . 1 Press F to select DIMMR. P ress F repeatedly until DIMMR appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn dimmer on. DIMMR:ON appears in the display. # T o turn dimmer off , press q. Initial Settings En 80 Section 14
Black plate (81,1) <CRB2123-A/U>81 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit îÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put) can be used for full-range speaker ( R-SP :FUL) or subwoofer ( R-SP :S/W) connec- tion. If you switch the rear output setting to R-SP :S/W , you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for rear full-range spea k- er connection ( R-SP :FUL). When rear output is connected to full range speakers (when R-SP :FUL is selected), you can connect the RCA subwoofer output to a subwoofer . In this case, you can select whether to use the sub- woofer controller îÂÂs (low pass filter , phase) built-in P/O :S/W or the auxiliar y P/O :FUL . 1 Press F to select R-SP. P ress F repeatedly until R-SP appears in the display . 2 Press r or q to switch the rear out- put setting. P ressing r or q will switch between R-SP :FUL (full-range speaker) and R-SP :S/W (subwoofer) and that status will be displayed. # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select R-SP :FUL. # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, set for subwoofer R-SP :S/W . # When the rear output setting is R-SP :S/W, you cannot change the subwoofer controller . 3 Press m or n to switch the subwoo- fer output or non fading output. P ressing m or n will switch between P/O :S/W and P/O :FUL and that status will be displayed. Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the nonfading output (refer to Using nonfading output on page 59) or subwoofer output (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 58) in the audio menu on. ! If you change the subwoofer controller , sub- woofer output and nonfading output in the audio menu return to the factor y settings. Switching the telephone muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated automatically when a call is made or re- ceived using a cellular telephone connected to this unit. 1 Press F to select TEL. P ress F repeatedly until TEL appears in the dis- play . 2 Press m or n to switch the tele- phone muting/attenuation. P ressing m or n will switch between TEL :A (attenuation) and TEL :MUT (muting) and that status will be displayed. # Y ou can select in the following setting: ! TEL :MUT î Muting ! TEL :A20 î Attenuation (TEL :A20 has a stronger effect than TEL :A10) ! TEL :A10 î Attenuation Notes ! The sound is muted or attenuated, MUTE or AT T are displayed and no audio adjustment is possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Initial Settings En 81 Section 14 Initial Settings
Black plate (82,1) <CRB2123-A/U>82 Switching the automatic disc playback Y ou can turn automatic disc playback on or off when you insert a disc into the disc loading slot. When this function is on, the disc will be automatically played after it is inserted into the disc loading slot. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 Press F to select DSC-A. P ress F repeatedly until DSC-A appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn automatic playback on. DSC-A:ON appears in the display. # P ress q to turn automatic playback off . Correcting distorted sound Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer cur ve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW. Normally , leave the set- ting at HI to ensure quality sound. 1 Press F to select D_A TT. P ress F repeatedly until D_A TT appears in the display . 2 Press r or q to select LOW or HI . P ressing r or q will switch between HI (high) and LOW (low) and that status will be displayed. # T o cancel initial settings, press BAND. # Y ou can also cancel initial settings by holding down F until the unit turns off . Resetting the audio functions Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Y ou can reset audio functions other than the following settings. ! V olume setting (refer to Adjusting the vo- lume on page 16) ! Listening position setting (refer to Using the position selector on page 63) ! F ader/balance setting (refer to Using bal- ance adjustment on page 63) ! SLA (source level adjustment) setting (refer to Adjusting source levels on page 63) ! Dynamic range control (refer to Using the dynamic range control on page 64) ! Direct control setting (refer to Using the di- rect control on page 64) ! Down-mix setting (refer to Using the down- mix function on page 64) 1 Press F to select A-RESET. P ress F repeatedly until A-RESET appears in the display . 2 Press r to display RESETOK? . RESETOK? appears in the display. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, press BAND . 3 Press n to display REALL Y? . REALL Y? appears in the display . # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, press BAND . 4 Press r to reset audio functions. COMPLETE appears in the display. Initial Settings En 82 Section 14
Black plate (83,1) <CRB2123-A/U>83 T ur ning the clock display on or of f Y ou can turn the clock display on or off . % Press CLOCK to turn the clock display on or off. Each press of CLOCK turns the clock display on or off . # The clock display disappears temporarily when you per form other operations, but the clock display appears again after 25 seconds. Note Even when the sources are off , the clock display appears on the display . Pressing CLOCK turns the clock display on or off . Setting the level indicator These are two stored level indicator to select from. % Press EQ and hold to select the level in- dicator . P ress EQ and hold repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: Level indicator 1 î Level indicator 2 î Level in- dicator full î Level indicator off Note When the optical inputs 1 and 2 on DEQ-P7650 are occupied and AUX is connected to this unit, the level indicators may be incorrectly dis- played. Using the AUX source An IP -BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this unit to auxiliar y equipment fea- turing RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Interconnector owner îÂÂs man- ual. Selecting AUX as the source % Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. P ress SOURCE until AUX appears in the dis- play . # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. F or more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 80. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, press F and hold until TITLE IN ap- pears in the display . 2 Press r or q to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of r will display a letter of the al- phabet in A B C ... X Y Z, numbers and sym- bols in 1 2 3 ... > [ ] order . Each press of q will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 3 Press n to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press n to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . P ress m to move backwards in the display . Other Functions En 83 Section 15 Other Functions
Black plate (84,1) <CRB2123-A/U>84 4 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing n after entering the title. When you press n one more time, the en- tered title is stored in memor y . 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Switching between digital and analog When this unit is connected to the DEQ- P7650, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or digital. 1 Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. P ress SOURCE until AUX appears in the dis- play . # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. F or more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 80. 2 Press BAND to switch the modes. P ress BAND repeatedly to switch between the following modes: ANALOG (analog) î DIGIT AL (digital) Note When this unit is connected to the DEQ-P7650, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or di- gital. However , when you use AUX as the source, make sure the AUX mode is set to analog. AUX digital should not be used with this unit. Introduction of DVD operation Y ou can use this unit with a separately sold DVD player or multi-DVD player . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player îÂÂs or multi-DVD player îÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player î so r multi-DVD player îÂÂs operation manual. Operation Y ou can use the following function with this unit. (Reference page is in this manual.) ! Using ITS playlist and disc title functions (Refer to the next page.) Also, operation of the following function with this unit differs. (Reference page is in this manual.) ! F unction menu switching (Refer to this page.) Function menu switching % During DVD playback, press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î P AUSE (pause) % During Video CD playback, press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î P AUSE (pause) % During CD playback, press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î RDM (random play) î SCAN (scan play)î ITS-P (ITS play) î P AUSE (pause) Other Functions En 84 Section 15
Black plate (85,1) <CRB2123-A/U>85 Notes ! When using this unit with multi-DVD player , you can switch to ITS-P. ! Repeat play function is different depending on the disc types. î During DVD playback, press m or n to select the repeat range. î During Video CD or CD playback, press r or q to turn repeat play on or off . Using ITS playlist and disc title functions During CD playback when using this unit with a multi-DVD player , you can use these func- tions. Operation is same as for multi-CD player . Please refer to multi- CD player section. Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using BOOK.M. % Press BOOK.M to turn pause on when selecting the following sources: ! DVD î Built-in DVD player ! S DVD î DVD player/multi-DVD player ! MUL TI CD î Multi-CD player # T o turn pause off , press BOOK.M again. % Press BOOK.M and hold to tur n BSM on when selecting TUNER as the source. P ress BOOK.M and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press BOOK.M again. % Press BOOK.M and hold to tur n BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress BOOK.M and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press BOOK.M again. Other Functions En 85 Section 15 Other Functions
Black plate (86,1) <CRB2123-A/U>86 T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn îÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn îÂÂt operate. Leads and connectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connections are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper- ate incorrectly . T urn the unit off and then on. Operation with the remote con- trol isn îÂÂt possible. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorrect. Switch to the correct remote control mode. (P age 15) The remote control code is incor- rect. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. (P age 78) Batter y power is low . Load new batter y . (P age 9) Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. Check by using another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean disc. (P age 90) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly . Connect the cables correctly. The unit is performing still, slow mo- tion or frame-by- frame playback. There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The icon is displayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc îÂÂs organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback. After pressing g once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly . The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriate setting for your display. (P age 76) Additional Information En 86 Appendix
Black plate (87,1) <CRB2123-A/U>87 Symptom Cause Action (See) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 6, P age 96) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (P age 77) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number . (P age 77) Y ou have forgot ten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 78) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings. Y ou cann ot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch betwee n items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch betwee n items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in SET -UP MENU . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in SET -UP MENU . Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in SET -UP MENU is not recorded on the disc. Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cann ot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes recorded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angles when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizon tal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Additional Information En 87 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (88,1) <CRB2123-A/U>88 Symptom Cause Action (See) Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. DSP Symptom Cause Action Speakers are not available to be adjusted. Their size settings is at OFF . Make the correct size settings. (P age 66) Time alignment is not available. Listening pos ition is not set cor- rectly . Set listening position correctly . (P age 63) Speaker size settings is at OFF . Make the correct size settings. (P age 66) The subwoofer is not available to switch its phase. The subwoofer is set to OFF . Set the subwoofer to ON. (P age 66) Bass content is not heard. The subwoofer is set to OFF and yet other speakers are set to OFF or SML in size. Make the correct settings. (If no subwoofer is installed, the front or rear speaker needs to be set to LRG.) (P age 66) Ocassionally no sounds are out- put when Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on. The center speaker setting is at SML or LRG whereas no center speaker is installed. Change the center speaker size setting to OFF . (If the audio source is mono and Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on, sound is heard over the center speaker only .) (P age 66) Occasionally no sounds are heard over speakers other than the center one. Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on. T urn Dolby Pro Logic II off . (If the audio source is mono and Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on, sound is heard over the center speaker only .) (P age 65) T urning dynamic range control on has no effects. The currently reproduced sound is not Dolby Digital coded. The feature is only effective on Dolby Digital sounds. (P age 64) No sounds are heard. Optical cables are incorrectly con- nected. Connect the cables correctly. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest P ioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to record the error message. Error messages Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. TEMP The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit îÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. Additional Information En 88 Appendix
Black plate (89,1) <CRB2123-A/U>89 Message Cause Action (See) NON-PLA Y The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play . The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly . ERROR-05 Electrical or mechanical T urn the ignition ON and OFF , or switch to a different source, then back to the DVD player . PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by digital rights manage- ment (DRM) Replace disc. SKIPPED The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digital rights management (DRM) Replace disc. Error messages on the display Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Check that the disc is loaded correctly . THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit îÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. DIFFERENT REGION DISC The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON-PLA Y ABLE DISC This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play . The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly . Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display . If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action ERR_MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Additional Information En 89 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (90,1) <CRB2123-A/U>90 Message Cause Action ERR_FSP , ERR_FLSP , ERR_FRSP , ERR_CSP , ERR_RLSP , ERR_RRSP , ERR_SW The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the microphone correctly . ERR_NOIS The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the microphone correctly . DVD player and care ! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular , non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play prop- erly . ! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warping before playing. Discs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly . Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed) sur face when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! If the heater is used in cold weather , con- densation may form on components inside the DVD player . Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly . If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow it to dr y out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the V ideo Recording format (VR mode). Additional Information En 90 Appendix
Black plate (91,1) <CRB2123-A/U>91 ! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the V ideo format (video mode), be- cause of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD -ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/C D-RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto- rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD -R/CD-RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip func- tion of the CD-R/CD -RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped automatically (in case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD -RW discs before using them. MP3 and WMA files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media " Audio and refers to an audio compression tech- nology that is developed by Microsoft Cor- poration. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate cor- rectly . ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! This unit allows playback of MP3 files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD -RW discs. Disc re- cordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. ! It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. ! MP3/WMA files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3 or .wma), is 64, from the first character . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. Additional Information En 91 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (92,1) <CRB2123-A/U>92 ! In case of files recorded according to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 charac- ters can be displayed. ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD -EXTRA and MIXED -MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA. ! The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. For this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However , there also is some writing sof tware which per- mits setting of the playback order . ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discs are converted to MP3/WMA files and burned to a CD-R/CD-RW/CD - ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD. Important ! When naming an MP3 or a WMA file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3 or .wma). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.mp3 or .wma) as an MP3 or a WMA file. T o prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than MP3 or WMA files. MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible with the ID3 T ag V er . 1.0, 1.1, 2.2 and 2.3 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. Ver . 2.x of ID3 T ag is given priority when both V er . 1.x and V er . 2.x exist. ! The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequen- cies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility . ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally be- comes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7 and 8. ! Y ou can only play back WMA files in the fre- quencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 192 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). ! This unit doesn îÂÂt support the following for- mats. î Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (5.1ch) î Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless î Windows Media Audio 9 Voice Additional Information En 92 Appendix
Black plate (93,1) <CRB2123-A/U>93 About folders and MP3/ WMA files ! An outline of a CD -ROM with MP3/WMA files on it is shown below . Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently se- lected. 3 1 2 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number .) ! MP3/WMA files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However , there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 253 items from folders on one disc. Additional Information En 93 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (94,1) <CRB2123-A/U>94 Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Alban ian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagas y (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T onga (to), 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongoli an (mn), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Malte se (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no ), 1415 W olof (wo), 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612 Additional Information En 94 Appendix
Black plate (95,1) <CRB2123-A/U>95 T erms Aspect ratio This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist îÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for - mat logic of CD-ROM folders and files. F or the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 charac ters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the î _î sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark îÂÂ. î and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the î WINAMP î soft- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). Additional Information En 95 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (96,1) <CRB2123-A/U>96 MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult- or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit îÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by V ideo CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit îÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of the unit. Additional Information En 96 Appendix
Black plate (97,1) <CRB2123-A/U>97 Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality . WMA WMA is short for Windows Media " Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corpora- tion. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Additional Information En 97 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (98,1) <CRB2123-A/U>98 Specifications General Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC (allowable voltage range: 12.0 î 14.4 V DC) Grounding system ................... Negative type Max. current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 0 m m Nose ........................... 1 8 8 à5 8 à2 0 m m D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 5 m m Nose ........................... 1 7 0 à4 6 à1 5 m m W eight .......................................... 1 . 4 k g Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15 000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoofer) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 î 8 W [2 W for 1 ch] al- lowable) P reout max output level/output impedance ..................................................... 2 . 2 V/1k W Equalizer (3-Band P arametric Equalizer): Low F requency ................ 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ12dB Mid F requency ................ 200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ12dB High F requency ................ 3.15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ12dB Loudness contour: L o w ....................................... 3.5 dB (100 Hz), 3 dB (10 kHz) M i d ....................................... 1 0 d B (100 Hz), 6.5 dB (10 kHz) High ..................................... 1 1 d B (100 Hz), 11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: îÂÂ30 dB) T one controls: Bass F requency ................ 40/63/100/160 Hz Gain ............................ ñ12dB T reble F requency ................ 2.5k/4k/6.3k/10k Hz Gain ............................ ñ12dB HPF : F requency .......................... 50/80/125 Hz Slope .................................... îÂÂ12 dB/oct Subwoofer: F requency .......................... 50/80/125 Hz Slope .................................... îÂÂ18 dB/oct Gain ...................................... ñ12dB Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse DVD Player System .......................................... D V D video, Video CD, Com- pact disc audio system Usable discs .............................. D V D video, Video CD, Com- pact disc Region number: for Middle East Asian and South African models ........................................... 2 for Southeast Asian models ........................................... 3 for South American and Oceanian models ........................................... 4 Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 44.1/48/96 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16/20/24; linear F requency response ............... 5 î 44 000 Hz (with DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 9 7 d B ( 1 kHz) (IEC -A net- work) (CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) Dynamic range ......................... 9 5 d B ( 1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz) Output level: Video .................................... 1 . 0 Vp-p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Audio ................................... 1. 0 V ( 1 k H z , 0 d B ) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t ereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ve r. 7 & 8 Additional Information En 98 Appendix
Black plate (99,1) <CRB2123-A/U>99 FM tuner F requency range ...................... 87.5 î 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 1 0 d B f (0.9 õV/75 W , mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 5 d B (IEC -A network) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf , 1 kHz, mono) F requency response ............... 3 0 î 15 000 Hz (ñ3 dB) Stereo separation .................... 4 5 d B ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz) AM tuner F requency range ...................... 5 3 1 î 1 602 kHz (9 kHz) 530 î 1 640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 1 8 õ V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B (IEC -A network) Infrared remote control W avelength ................................. 9 4 0 n m ñ 5 0 nm Output ........................................... typ; 12 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. Additional Information En 99 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (100,1) PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU , T OKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, K eetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD . 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontar io L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 H àá ý î Pl ø = l ø : ðî î - qî ï î õ 44 _13 î û q : (02) 2521-3588 H àû P î î /î îÂÂPl ø î / ] î î î î w/ àî L F m- à9 îÂÂ901-6 ä û q : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright é 2005 by Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. Printed in China <CRB2123-A/U> RC,RD ,RI <KMIZX> <05F00000> <CRB2123-A/U>100
Black plate (2,1) <CRB2123-A/U>2 Thank you for buying this P ioneer product. Please rea d through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model prope rly . After you have finished read ing the instr uctions, keep this ma n- ual in a safe pla ce for future refer ence. Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 6 ! DVD video disc region numbers 6 ! When an operation is prohibited 9 Precautions T o ensure safe driving 5 Before Y ou Start About this unit 6 Playable discs 6 DVD video disc region numbers 6 About this manual 7 F eatures 7 About WMA 8 What the marks on DVDs indicate 9 Use and care of the remote control 9 What îÂÂs What Head unit 11 Remote control 12 Basic Operations Using the remote control operation mode switch 15 T urning the unit on 15 Selecting a source 15 Loading a disc 16 Adjusting the volume 16 T urning the unit off 16 P rotecting your unit from theft 17 T uner Listening to the radio 18 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 19 Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 19 T uning in strong signals 19 Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 20 Playing DVD video discs W atching a DVD video 21 Basic operation of DVD video 21 Specifying title 22 Specifying chapter 22 Selecting a chapter directly 22 F rame-by-frame playback 23 P ausing DVD video playback 23 Slow motion playback 23 Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 23 Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 24 Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 24 Resume playback (Bookmark) 25 Operating from the information displays 25 Operating from the function display 28 Playing Video CDs W atching a Video CD 29 Basic operation of Video CD 29 Specifying track 30 Selecting a track directly 30 P ausing Video CD playback 30 Slow motion playback 31 Operating from the information display 31 Operating from the function display 33 Playing CDs Listening to a CD 34 Basic operation of CD 34 Operating from the information display 35 Contents En 2
Black plate (3,1) <CRB2123-A/U>3 Operating from the function display 37 Playing MP3/WMA Listening to MP3/WMA 40 Basic operation of MP3/WMA 40 Operating from the information display 42 Operating from the function display 44 Multi-CD Player Playing a CD 47 Selecting a track directly 47 50-disc multi-CD player 48 Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 48 Repeating play 48 Playing tracks in random order 49 Scanning CDs and tracks 49 P ausing CD playback 49 Using ITS playlists 50 Using disc title functions 51 Using CD TEXT functions 52 Using compression and dynamic bass emphasis 53 Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 54 Using the equalizer 55 Compensating for equalizer cur ves (EQ- EX) 55 Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) 55 Using balance adjustment 56 Adjusting equalizer cur ves 56 Fine-adjusting equalizer cur ve 57 Adjusting bass and treble 57 Adjusting loudness 58 Using subwoofer output 58 Using nonfading output 59 Using the high pass filter 59 Adjusting source levels 60 Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustmen ts 61 Using the sound field control 62 Using the position selector 63 Using balance adjustment 63 Adjusting source levels 63 Using the dynamic range control 64 Using the direct control 64 Using the down-mix function 64 Using the Dolby P ro Logic II 65 Setting the speaker setting 66 Selecting a cross-over frequency 67 Adjusting the speaker output levels 67 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 68 Using the time alignment 68 Using the auto-equalizer 69 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 69 Using the equalizer 72 Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 74 Returning to the previous display 74 Setting the subtitle language 74 Setting the audio language 75 Setting the menu language 75 Setting assist subtitles on or off 76 Setting angle icon display 76 Setting the aspect ratio 76 Setting the parental lock 77 Automatic playback of DVDs 78 Setting remote control code type 78 Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings 79 Setting the clock 79 En 3 Contents
Black plate (4,1) <CRB2123-A/U>4 Setting the FM tuning step 79 Setting the AM tuning step 80 Switching the warning tone 80 Switching the auxiliar y setting 80 Switching the dimmer setting 80 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 81 Switching the telephone muting/ attenuation 81 Switching the automatic disc playback 82 Correcting distorted sound 82 Resetting the audio functions 82 Other Functions T urning the clock display on or off 83 Setting the level indicator 83 Using the AUX source 83 Switching between digital and analog 84 Introduction of DVD operation 84 Using the PGM button 85 Additional Information T roubleshooting 86 Error messages 88 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 89 DVD player and care 90 DVD discs 90 CD-R/CD-RW discs 91 MP3 and WMA files 91 About folders and MP3/WMA files 93 Language code chart for DVD 94 T erms 95 Specifications 98 Contents En 4
Black plate (5,1) <CRB2123-A/U>5 T o ensure safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWIT CH. IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also, rear displays should not be in a location where it is a visible distraction to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit îÂÂs DVD features should not be used. This unit detects whether your car îÂÂs parking brake is engaged or not, and prevents you from watching a DVD or Video CD on the dis- play connected to FRONT VIDEO OUTPUT while driving. When you attempt to watch a DVD/Video CD, the screen will turn black. When you park your car in a safe place and apply the parking brake, the picture appears on the screen. When using a display connected to DVD REAR MONI TOR OUTPUT This unit îÂÂs DVD REAR MONITOR OUTPUT is for connection of a display to enable passen- gers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or Video CD. WARNING NEVER install the display in a location that en- ables the driver to watch the DVD or Video CD while driving. Precautions En 5 Section 01 Precautions
Black plate (6,1) <CRB2123-A/U>6 About this unit CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, this unit damage, smoke, and overheat could result from contact with liquids. ! î CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCTî This product contains a laser diode of higher class than 1. T o ensure continued safety , do not remove any covers or attempt to gain ac- cess to the inside of the product. Refer all ser- vicing to qualified personnel. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memor y will be erased and must be reprogrammed. ! If this unit does not operate properly , contact your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer Ser- vice Station. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Li- censing Corporation. ! It is not possible to play back DVD audio disc. This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc region numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit. Before Y ou Start En 6 Section 02
Black plate (7,1) <CRB2123-A/U>7 The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit îÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. This manual mainly explains remote control operation. However , in addition to those func- tions related with DVD/Video CD/CD/MP3/ WMA operation that can only be operated by the remote control, there are also functions that can be operated similarly by the head unit and functions that can only be operated by the buttons provided for the head unit. Features DVD video playback It is possible to play back DVD video, DVD -R (video mode) and DVD-RW (video mode). Remember that use of this system for com- mercial or public viewing purposes may con- stitute an infringement on the author îÂÂs rights protected by the Copyright Law . Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). CD playback Music CD/CD -R/CD-RW playback is possible. MP3 file playback Y ou can play back MP3 files recorded on CD- ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). ! Supply of this product only conveys a li- cense for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broad- casting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broadcasting/streaming via internet, intranets and/or other net- works or in other electronic content distri- bution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An inde- pendent license for such use is required. F or details, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. WMA file playback Y ou can play back WMA files recorded on CD- ROM/CD-R/CD -RW (ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2 standard recordings). NTSC/P AL compatibility This unit is NTSC/P AL system compatible. When connecting other components to this unit, be sure components are compatible with the same video system other wise images will not be correctly reproduced. Before Y ou Start En 7 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Black plate (8,1) <CRB2123-A/U>8 Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility ! Manufactured under license from Dolby La- boratories. îÂÂDolby îÂÂ, îÂÂPro Logic îÂÂ, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. ! î DTSî is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Multi-channel processor control When using this unit with a P ioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo- sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel re- cordings. Multi-aspect Switching between wide screen, letterbox and panscan display is possible. Multi-audio Y ou can switch between multiple audio sys- tems recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-subtitle Y ou can switch between multiple subtitle lan- guages recorded on a DVD as desired. Multi-angle Y ou can switch between multiple viewing an- gles of a scene recorded on a DVD as desired. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA The Windows Media " logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology that is developed by Microsof t Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Notes ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate correctly . ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
Black plate (9,1) <CRB2123-A/U>9 What the marks on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the number of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the number of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the number of viewing an- gles. 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to-height ratio) type. 2 3 4 ALL Indicates the number of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Use and care of the remote control Installing the battery Slide the tray out on the back of the remote control and insert the batter y with the plus ( ) and minus ( îÂÂ) poles pointing in the proper di- rection. ! When using for the first time, pull out the film protruding from the tray. WARNING Keep the batter y out of the reach of children. Should the batter y be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor . CAUTION ! Use only one CR2025 (3 V) lithium batter y . ! Remove the batter y if the remote control is not used for a month or longer . ! Do not recharge, disassemble, heat or dispose of the batter y in fire. ! Do not handle the batter y with metallic tools. ! Do not store the batter y with metallic materi- als. ! In the event of batter y leakage, wipe the re- mote control completely clean and install a new batter y . ! When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or en- vironmental public institutions î rules that apply in your countr y/area. ! Always check carefully that you are loading the batter y with its plus ( ) and minus ( îÂÂ) poles facing in the proper directions. Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Black plate (10,1) <CRB2123-A/U>10 Using the remote control P oint the remote control in the direction of the front panel to operate. ! The remote control may not function prop- erly in direct sunlight. Important ! Do not store the remote control in high tem- peratures or direct sunlight. ! Do not let the remote control fall onto the floor , where it may become jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
Black plate (1 1,1) <CRB2123-A/U>11 Head unit 1 DISPLA Y button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress to select differ ent displays. 2 VOLUME When you press VOLUME, it extends out- ward so that it becomes easier to turn. T o re- tract VOLUME, press it again. Rotate it to increase or decrease the volume. 3 CLOCK button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress to change to the clock display . 4 BAND button P ress to select among three FM bands and one AM band and to cancel the control mode of functions. 5 OPEN button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress to open the front panel. 6 F (function) button P ress to select func tions. 7 a /b /c /d buttons When controlling sources ! These buttons can per form the same op- eration as m/ n/ o/ p/ r/ q but- tons on the remote control. P ress to do manual seek tuning, fast for ward, re- verse, track search and folder select con- trols. When controlling functions ! These buttons can per form the same op- eration as r/ q/ m/ n buttons on the remote control. 8 A (audio) button P ress to select various sound quality con- trols. 9 EQ-EX button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress and hold to switch between EQ-EX and SFEQ functions. Press to operate each function. a 1 îÂÂ6 buttons These buttons can per form the same opera- tion as NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) buttons on the re- mote control. P ress for preset tuning and disc number search when using a multi-CD/ DVD player . 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 a b c 3 What î s Wha t En 11 Section 03 What î s What
Black plate (12,1) <CRB2123-A/U>12 b EQ button This button is only available on the head unit. P ress to select various equalizer cur ves. c SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. Remote control 1 Remote control selection switch Switch to change the setting of the remote control. For details, refer to Setting remote control code type on page 78. 2 VOLUME button P ress to increase or decrease the volume. 3 TOP MENU (TOP .M) button P ress to return to the top menu during DVD playback. 4 MENU button P ress to display the DVD menu during DVD playback. 1 1 1 2 f f f g g g h h h i i i j k k k l l l m m m d c b b b a 9 9 9 8 8 8 7 7 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 3 n n n o o o p p p e e e What î s Wha t En 12 Section 03
Black plate (13,1) <CRB2123-A/U>13 5 RETURN button P ress to return to the previous display when the SET -UP MENU is displayed. P ress to display the PBC (playback control) menu during PBC playback. 6 AUDIO button P ress to change the audio language during DVD playback. 7 DISPLA Y button P ress to change the information display while the DVD player is playing as the source. 8 SUBTITLE (S.TITILE) button P ress to change the subtitle language dur- ing DVD playback. 9 ANGLE button P ress to change the viewing angle during DVD playback. a PLA Y/P AUSE ( f) button P ress to switch sequentially between play- back and pause. b REVERSE ( m) button P ress to perform fast reverse playback or seek tuning while the tuner is playing as the source. c PREVIOUS ( o)/F (function) button When the remote control is set to DVD mode, press to return to the previous track (chapter). If the remote control is set to DVH mode, the function menu appears on the head unit display . d NUMBER buttons P ress to directly select the desired track, chapter , preset tuning and disc. 1 îÂÂ6 buttons can operate the preset tuning for the tuner or disc number search for the multi-CD player . e DIRECT button P ress to do direct channel select. f SOURCE button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. g Joystick Move to select the setting. Click to set the setting or select on or off . h Remote control operation mode switch Switch the operation mode between DVD mode (only the DVD player can be operated by the remote control) or DVH mode (all sources of this unit can be operated by the remote control). (Refer to page 15.) i BAND button P ress to select among three FM bands and one AM band and to cancel the control mode of functions. j BOOKMARK (BOOK.M) button DVH mode P ress to operate the preprogrammed func- tions for each source. (Refer to Using the PGM button on page 85.) DVD mode P ress to turn the bookmark function on or off . For details, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 25. k STEP ( r/ q) button P ress to move ahead one frame at a time during DVD/VideoCD playback. P ress and hold for one second to activate slow play- back. l A TT button P ress to quickly lower the volume level, by about 90%. P ress once more to return to the original volume level. What î s Wha t En 13 Section 03 What î s What
Black plate (14,1) <CRB2123-A/U>14 m FORW ARD ( n) button P ress to perform fast for ward playback or seek tuning while the tuner is playing as the source. n STOP ( g) button P ress to stop playback. o NEXT ( p)/A (audio) button When the remote control is set to DVD mode, press to go to the next track (chap- ter). If the remote control is set to DVH mode, the audio menu appears on the head unit display . p CLEAR button P ress to cancel the input number when NUMBER are used. What î s Wha t En 14 Section 03
Black plate (15,1) <CRB2123-A/U>15 Using the remote control operation mode switch There are two remote control operation modes on the remote control. If you want to operate this unit by remote control, turn the mode switch to DVH mode. In this case, both the head unit îÂÂs buttons and remote control can control this unit. DVH mode operation When operating this unit by remote control, the mode is normally switched to DVH. ! It is possible to use the r/ q/ m / n buttons on the remote control to per form the same operations as the a/ b/ c/ d but- tons on the head unit. ! Numbers ( 1 îÂÂ6) can per form the same op- erations as 1 îÂÂ6 buttons on the head unit. î If you want to select a disc located at 7 to 12 by using buttons 1 îÂÂ6, press and hold the corresponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number ap- pears in the display . DVD mode operation If you switch the mode to DVD, the joystick and NUMBER operations are changed for DVD player . % When you want to operate the follow- ing functions, switch the mode to DVD: ! When operating the DVD menu by using the joystick. (Refer to Basic operation of DVD video on page 21.) ! When operating the PBC menu by using NUMBER . (Refer to Watching a V ideo CD on page 29.) ! When specifying title or track by using NUMBER . (Refer to Specifying title on page 22 and Specifying track on page 30.) Note If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. T ur ning the unit on % Press SOURCE to turn the unit on. When you select a source, the unit is turned on. Selecting a source Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. If DSC-A is turned on, load a disc in the unit to switch to DVD (refer to Switching the auto - matic disc playback on page 82). % Press SOURCE to select a source. P ress SOURCE repeatedly to switch between the following sources: TUNER (tuner) î TV (television) î AV (video input) î DVD (built-in DVD player) î S DVD (DVD player/multi-DVD player) î MUL TI CD (multi-CD player) î EXT (external unit 1) î EXT (external unit 2) î AUX (AUX) Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change: î When there is no unit corresponding to the selected source connected to this unit. î When there is no disc in the unit. î When there is no disc in the DVD player . î When there is no magazine in the multi- CD player . î When there is no magazine in the multi- DVD player . Basic Operations En 15 Section 04 Basic Operations
Black plate (16,1) <CRB2123-A/U>16 î When the AUX (auxiliar y input) is set to off (refer to page 80). ! External unit refers to a P ioneer product (such as one available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions by this unit. T wo external units can be controlled by this unit. When two exter- nal units are connected, the allocation of them to external unit 1 or external unit 2 is automatically set by this unit. ! When this unit îÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the car îÂÂs auto-antenna relay control term- inal, the car îÂÂs antenna extends when this unit îÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the an- tenna, turn the source off . (When you con- nected a Pioneer multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7650) to this unit, auto -antenna cannot be controled.) Loading a disc 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. Disc loading slot appears. # After a disc has been inserted, press SOURCE to select the DVD player . 2 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. When you set DSC-A:ON, playback will auto- matically start. If you set DSC-A:OFF, press SOURCE to select DVD (refer to the previous page). Disc loading slot EJECT button # T o eject a disc, press EJECT. # T o avoid a malfunction, make sure that no metal object comes into contact with the term- inals when the front panel is open. 3 Close the fr ont panel. Notes ! The DVD player plays one, standard, 12-cm or 8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed on Playable discs on page 6. ! If you cannot insert a disc completely or if after you insert a disc the disc does not play , check that the label side of the disc is up. P ress EJECT to eject the disc, and check the disc for damage before inserting it again. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to Error messages on page 88. ! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. For more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 25. Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME to adjust the sound level. With the head unit, rotate VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. With the remote control, press VOLUME to in- crease or decrease the volume. T ur ning the unit off % Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. Basic Operations En 16 Section 04
Black plate (17,1) <CRB2123-A/U>17 Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached from the head unit and stored in the protective case provided to discourage theft. ! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. ! Y ou can turn off the warning tone. See Switching the warning tone on page 80. Important ! Never use force or grip the display and the buttons too tightly when removing or attach- ing. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shocks. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. Removing the front panel 1 Press OPEN to open the front panel. 2 Gently grip the left side of the front panel and slowly pull it outward. T ake care not to grip it too tightly or to drop the front panel and protect it from contact with water or other fluids to prevent perma- nent damage. 3 Put the front panel into the protective case provided for safe keeping. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by holding it upright to the unit and clipping it securely into the mounting hooks. Basic Operations En 17 Section 04 Basic Operations
Black plate (18,1) <CRB2123-A/U>18 Listening to the radio 2 1 3 5 4 4 4 These are the basic steps necessar y to operate the radio. More advanced tuner operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Band indicator Shows which band the radio is tuned to , AM or FM. 2 Signal level indicator Shows the radio wave strength. 3 Frequency indicator Shows to which frequency the tuner is tuned. 4 Stereo ( 5) indicator Shows when the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo. 5 Preset number indicator Shows which preset has been selected. 1 Press SOURCE to select the tuner . P ress SOURCE until you see TUNER dis- played. 2 Press BAND to select a band. P ress BAND until the desired band is dis- played, F1, F2, F3 for FM or AM . 3 T o perform manual tuning, press m or n with quick presses. The frequencies move up or down step by step. 4 T o perform seek tuning, press and hold m or n for about one second and re - lease. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by pressing either m or n with a quick press. # If you press and hold m or n you can skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the buttons. Note When the frequency selected is being broadcast in stereo the stereo ( 5) indicator will light. T uner En 18 Section 05
Black plate (19,1) <CRB2123-A/U>19 Introduction of advanced tuner operation 2 1 1 1 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 LOC indicator Shows when local seek tuning is on. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: BSM (best stations memor y) î LOCAL (local seek tuning) # T o return to the frequency display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the frequency display . Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies If you press any of the NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) you can easily store up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall with the touch of a button. % When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory press a NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) and hold until the preset number stops flashing. The number you have pressed will flash in the preset number indicator and then remain lit. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memory. The next time you press the same NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y. Notes ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memory. ! Y ou can also use q and r to recall radio station frequencies assigned to NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) . T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. 1 Press F to select LOCAL. P ress F until LOCAL appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn local seek tuning on. Local seek sensitivity (e.g., LOCAL 2) appears in the display . 3 Press m or n to set the sensitivity . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: LOCAL 1 î LOCAL 2 î LOCAL 3 î LOCAL 4 AM: LOCAL 1 î LOCAL 2 The LOCAL 4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. T uner En 19 Section 05 T uner
Black plate (20,1) <CRB2123-A/U>20 4 When you want to return to normal seek tuning, press q to turn local seek tuning off. LOCAL:OFF appears in the display. Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) and once stored there you can tune in to those frequen- cies with the touch of a button. 1 Press F to select BSM. P ress F until BSM appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, press q. Note Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may re- place broadcast frequencies you have saved using NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6). T uner En 20 Section 05
Black plate (21,1) <CRB2123-A/U>21 W atching a DVD video 1 4 2 2 2 5 3 3 3 6 6 Head unit îÂÂs display 2 2 2 6 3 3 3 1 1 1 When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Information display These are the basic steps necessar y to play a DVD video with your DVD player . More ad- vanced DVD video operation is explained start- ing on page 25. 1 DVD (DVD-V) indicator Shows when a DVD video is playing. 2 Title number indicator Shows the title currently playing. ! On the head unit îÂÂs display , if the elapsed playing time of current chapter is more than 100 minutes, T in the title number indicator disappears. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent chapter . 4 dts indicator Shows the DTS is on when the multi-chan- nel processor (DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit. 5 Dolby Digital indicator Shows when the Dolby Digital is turned on. 6 Chapter number indicator Shows the chapter currently playing. Basic operation of DVD video 1 Use the joystick to select the desired menu option. When the DVD offers a menu, a menu is dis- played. 2 Click the joystick. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # Y ou can display the menu by pressing the MENU or TOP MENU (TOP .M) while a disc is playing. Pressing either of these buttons again lets you start playback from the location selected from the menu. For details, refer to the instruc- tions provided with the disc. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the color of the icon m/ n changes from white to blue. When this happens, fast re- verse/fast for ward continues even if you release m or n . T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. Playing DVD video discs En 21 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (22,1) <CRB2123-A/U>22 4 T o skip back or forward to another chapter , press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next chapter . Pressing o once skips to the start of the current chapter . Pressing again will skip to the previous chapter . Chapter numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Using NUMBER also per forms the same op- eration. For more details, refer to Specifying chap- ter on this page. # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 5 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop DVD playback by pressing g, that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Specifying title T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired title number when the disc is stopped. Title number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected title. ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10, 10 and 3 in that order . Specifying chapter T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired chapter number during playback. Chapter number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected chapter . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10, 10 and 3 in that order . Selecting a chapter directly When using the remote control, you can select a chapter directly by entering the desired chapter number . 1 Press DIRECT. Chapter number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired chapter number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The chapter of entered number will play . Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. Playing DVD video discs En 22 Section 06
Black plate (23,1) <CRB2123-A/U>23 Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. % Press r . Each time you press r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, press f . Notes ! There is no sound during frame-by-frame play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that frame-by-frame playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. ! Reverse frame-by-frame playback is not possi- ble. Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Press r and hold during playback. The icon î î is displayed, forward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . 2 Press r or q to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press r or q it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 î 1/8 î 1/4 î 1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. 1 Press AUDIO during playback. The audio selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press AUDIO while the audio selection icon is displayed. The audio changes each time you press AUDIO . Playing DVD video discs En 23 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (24,1) <CRB2123-A/U>24 Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD îÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded lan- guages/audio systems. ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using SET -UP MENU . For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 75. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit îÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! While the audio selection icon is displayed, you can also switch to a desired audio lan- guage number using NUMBER. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. 1 Press SUBTITLE (S.TITILE) during play- back. The subtitle selection icon is displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press SUBTITLE (S.TITILE) while the sub- title selection icon is displayed. The subtitle language changes each time you press SUBTITLE (S.TITILE). Notes ! The number in the 2 mark on a DVD îÂÂs pack- age indicates the number of recorded subtitle languages. ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using SET -UP MENU . For details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 74. ! While the subtitle selection icon is displayed, you can also switch to a desired subtitle lan- guage number using NUMBER. At this time, you can also switch subtitle display off by pressing CLEAR. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using SET -UP MENU . For details, refer to Setting angle icon display on page 76. 1 Press ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. The angle icon and angle number are displayed for eight seconds. 2 Press ANGLE while the angle icon and angle number are displayed. The angle changes each time you press ANGLE . Playing DVD video discs En 24 Section 06
Black plate (25,1) <CRB2123-A/U>25 Notes ! The 3 mark on a DVD îÂÂs package indicates it features multi-angle scenes. The number in the 3 mark indicates the number of angles from which scenes were shot. ! P ressing ANGLE during fast forward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback, but the viewing angle does not change. ! While the angle icon and angle number are displayed, you can also switch to a desired angle number using NUMBER. Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. % During playback, press BOOKMARK (BOOK.M) at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to five discs. After that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press and hold BOOKMARK (BOOK.M) during playback. # Y ou can also bookmark a disc by pressing and holding EJECT at the point you want to bookmark. Next time you load the disc, playback will resume from the bookmarked point. Note that you can only bookmark one disc using this method. T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press EJECT. Operating from the information displays 1 1 1 Information display 1 lets you use the search function to specify a title or chapter to search for a desired scene, use the time search func- tion to specify a time to search for a desired scene, select the desired audio and subtitle language, and select the angle. In addition to the search and time search functions of the information display 1, infor- mation display 2 lets you select the range for repeat play. 1 Information display Shows the function status. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display 1 î Information dis- play 2 î Normal playback display Notes ! Y ou can per form title, chapter and time set- tings with either the information display 1 or 2. This manual explains how to use the infor- mation display 1 to per form title, chapter and time settings. ! P ressing DISPLA Y during fast for ward/reverse returns you to normal playback. Playing DVD video discs En 25 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (26,1) <CRB2123-A/U>26 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specif ying a title or chapter , and the time search function to specify the time on a disc at which play starts. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select a desired option. The selected option is highlighted. 2 Press NUMBER to input the desired number . For titles and chapters ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 2 and 3 in order . î T o jump 10 titles or chapters ahead of the selected one, press 10. For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, press 2, 1, 4 and 3 in order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and press buttons 7, 1, 0 and 0 in order . î T o jump 10 seconds ahead of the se- lected time, press 10. # P ressing CLEAR cancels the input number . # Y ou can also select titles and chapters by mov- ing the joystick up or down. # Y ou cannot select titles and chapters by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. In this case, use the joystick to select titles and chapters. 3 While the input number is displayed, click the joystick. This starts playback from the selected scene. Notes ! With discs featuring a menu, you can also press MENU or TOP MENU (TOP .M) and then make selections from the displayed menu. ! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played, indicating that titles, chapters and time cannot be specified. ! Chapter search and time search are not possi- ble when disc playback has been stopped. ! Even without using an information display you can start playback from a specified title or chapter . For details, refer to Specifying title on page 22 and Specifying chapter on page 22. Selecting audio, subtitle and angle Y ou can per form audio (language, stereo, audio type as Dolby Digital etc.), subtitle lan- guage and angle selection. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select a desired option. The selected option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. For Audio Selection options switch as follows: Audio 1 î Audio 2 î Audio 3 For Subtitles Selection options switch as follows: Subtitles 1 î Subtitles 2 î Subtitles 3 For Angle Selection options switch as follows: Angle 1 î Angle 2 î Angle 3 Notes ! The number of switching options depends on how many options are recorded on the DVD. ! Y ou can switch audio, subtitle and angle dur- ing playback using the respective buttons. Playing DVD video discs En 26 Section 06
Black plate (27,1) <CRB2123-A/U>27 ! Y ou can also switch settings by inputting numbers with NUMBER. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. Selecting repeat range Y ou can choose between repeat play of a disc, title or chapter . 1 Press DISPLA Y to switch to the informa- tion display 2. 2 Move the joystick left or right to select the repeat range option. The repeat range option is highlighted. 3 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! Disc î Repeat the current disc ! Title î Repeat just the current title ! Chapter î Repeat just the current chapter Note Certain DVD discs display a menu upon comple- tion of repeat playback. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. 1 Press DISPLA Y to switch to the informa- tion display 2. 2 Move the joystick left or right to select the audio option. The audio option is highlighted. 3 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! L R î Left and right ! L î Lef t ! R î Right Note This function is possible only with Linear PCM sound. Playing DVD video discs En 27 Section 06 Playing DVD video discs
Black plate (28,1) <CRB2123-A/U>28 Operating from the function display 1 1 1 2 The following functions can also be operated from the head unit îÂÂs display. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent chapter . % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î P AUSE (pause) ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the DVD playback : DSC (disc repeat), CHP (chapter re- peat), and TTL (title repeat). 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . 2 During DVD playback, press m or n to select the repeat range. P ress m or n until the desired repeat range appears in the display. ! DSC î Repeat the current disc ! TTL î Repeat just the current title ! CHP î Repeat just the current chapter Notes ! If you per form chapter search or fast forward/ reverse during CHP, the repeat play range changes to DSC. ! Y ou cannot operate repeating play when DVD AUTO PLA Y is on (refer to Automatic playback of DVDs on page 78). Pausing DVD video playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Playing DVD video discs En 28 Section 06
Black plate (29,1) <CRB2123-A/U>29 W atching a Video CD 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 Head unit îÂÂs display 3 3 3 2 2 2 1 1 1 When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Information display These are the basic steps necessar y to play a Video CD with your DVD player . More ad- vanced Video CD operation is explained start- ing on page 31. 1 VCD indicator Shows when a Video CD is playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. Basic operation of Video CD 1 Press NUMBER to select the desired menu option. When a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function starts playing, a menu is dis- played. ! Playback starts from the selected menu item. ! When the menu is two or more pages long, press o or p to switch between dis- plays. # Y ou can display the menu by pressing RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. # Operation with the joystick is not possible. # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you continue pressing m or n for five seconds, the color of the icon m/ n changes from white to blue. When this happens, fast re- verse/fast for ward continues even if you release m or n . T o resume playback at a desired point, press f . # F ast forward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this hap- pens, normal playback automatically resumes. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next track. Pressing o once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. T rack numbers are displayed for eight sec- onds. # Using NUMBER also per forms the same op- eration. For more details, refer to Specifying track on the next page. Playing Video CDs En 29 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (30,1) <CRB2123-A/U>30 # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 4 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop Video CD playback by pressing g , that location on the disc is memorized en- abling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Specifying track T o per form this function, set the remote con- trol to DVD mode. ! Y ou cannot operate this function by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. % Press NUMBER corresponding to a de- sired track number during playback. T rack number is displayed for eight seconds and playback starts from the selected track. ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 10 and 0 in that order . ! T o select 23, press 10, 10 and 3 in that order . Notes ! With some discs, the icon may be dis- played and operation may not be possible. ! With Video CD, direct search is not possible during PBC playback. Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play. Notes ! After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight seconds, the mode is automatically can- celed. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function cannot be op- erated. Pausing Video CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused, letting you view a still image. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicat- ing that still playback is not possible. Playing Video CDs En 30 Section 07
Black plate (31,1) <CRB2123-A/U>31 Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. 1 Press r and hold during playback. The icon î î is displayed, forward slow motion playback begins. # T o return to normal playback, press f . 2 Press r or q to adjust playback speed during slow motion playback. Each time you press r or q it changes the speed in four steps in the following order: 1/16 î 1/8 î 1/4 î 1/2 Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! Depending on the disc and the playback loca- tion on the disc, the icon may be displayed, indicating that slow motion playback is not possible. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. Operating from the information display 1 This display lets you use the search function to specif y a track to search for desired scenes, use the time search function to specify a time to search for a desired scene, switch audio output, and select the range for repeat play. During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PLA YBACK CONTROL ON is displayed. During such playback, search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play. (Refer to Selecting repeat range on the next page.) ! PBC playback of Video-CD cannot be can- celled. 1 Information display Shows the function status. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display î Normal playback display Playing Video CDs En 31 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (32,1) <CRB2123-A/U>32 Searching for a desired scene, starting playback from a specified time Y ou can use the search function to search for a desired scene by specif ying a track, and the time search function to specif y the time on a disc at which play starts. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. ! T rack search and time search are not possi- ble when disc playback has been stopped. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select a desired option. The selected option is highlighted. 2 Press NUMBER to input the desired number . For tracks ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 2 and 3 in order . î T o jump 10 tracks ahead of the selected one, press 10. For time (time search) ! T o select 21 minutes 43 seconds, press 2, 1, 4 and 3 in order . ! T o select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and press buttons 7, 1, 0 and 0 in order . î T o jump 10 seconds ahead of the se- lected time, press 10. # P ressing CLEAR cancels the input number . # Y ou can also select tracks by moving the joy- stick up or down. # Y ou cannot select tracks by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. In this case, use the joystick to select tracks. 3 While the input number is displayed, click the joystick. This starts playback from the selected scene. Notes ! Time search is not possible when disc play- back has been stopped. ! Even without using an information display you can start playback from a specified track. For details, refer to Specifying track on page 30. Selecting repeat range Y ou can choose between repeat play of a disc or a track. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the repeat range option. The repeat range option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! Disc î Repeat the current disc ! T rack î Repeat just the current track Notes ! When repeat play of a Video CD disc is se- lected, a menu may be displayed after play- back depending on the disc. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function cannot be op- erated. Selecting audio output Y ou can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the audio option. The audio option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! L R î Left and right ! L î Lef t ! R î Right Playing Video CDs En 32 Section 07
Black plate (33,1) <CRB2123-A/U>33 Operating from the function display 1 1 1 2 2 2 Repeat and pause functions can also be oper- ated from the head unit îÂÂs display . 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î P AUSE (pause) ! During PBC (Playback Control) playback, you cannot select RPT. ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play Repeat play lets you play the same track over again. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn repeat play on. RPT :ON appears in the display . The track cur- rently playing will play to the end and then re- peat. 3 Press q to turn repeat play off. RPT :OFF appears in the display . The track cur- rently playing will continue to play and then play the next track. Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Playing Video CDs En 33 Section 07 Playing Video CDs
Black plate (34,1) <CRB2123-A/U>34 Listening to a CD 1 1 1 3 2 2 Head unit îÂÂs display 1 1 1 3 3 3 2 2 2 When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Information display These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your DVD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 CD indicator Shows when a CD is playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. Basic operation of CD 1 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you select ROUGH, pressing and holding m or n enables you to search ever y 10 tracks in the current disc. (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 38.) 2 T o skip back or forward to another track, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next track. Pressing o once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 3 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop CD playback by pressing g, that location on the disc is memorized enabling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play. Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. Playing CDs En 34 Section 08
Black plate (35,1) <CRB2123-A/U>35 Operating from the information display 1 1 1 This display lets you use the search function to specif y a track to search for desired track, select the range for repat play , and switch ran- dom play and scan play on or off . 1 Information display Shows the function status. Searching for a desired track Y ou can use the search function to specify a track to search for a desired track. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the track option. The track option is highlighted. 2 Press NUMBER to input the desired number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 2 and 3 in order . î T o jump 10 tracks ahead of the selected one, press 10. # P ressing CLEAR cancels the input number . # Y ou can also select tracks by moving the joy- stick up or down. # Y ou cannot select tracks by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. In this case, use the joystick to select tracks. 3 While the input number is displayed, click the joystick. Play of the selected track starts. Selecting repeat range Y ou can choose between repeat play of a disc or a track. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the repeat range option. The repeat range option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! Disc î Repeat the current disc ! T rack î Repeat just the current track Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Setting random play Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the random option. The random option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! ON î T racks will play in a random order ! OFF î T racks will continue to play in order Setting scan play Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the scan option. The scan option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! ON î The first 10 seconds of each track is played ! OFF î T racks will continue to play Playing CDs En 35 Section 08 Playing CDs
Black plate (36,1) <CRB2123-A/U>36 3 When you find the desired track, move the joystick up or down to cancel the scan play . Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal play- back of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display î Disc Title (disc title display) î Disc Artist (disc artist name display) î T rack Title (track title display) î T rack Artist (track artist name display) ! If specific information has not been re- corded on a CD TEXT disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No T rack Title ). ! Some characters may not be displayed properly . Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL , ART NAME , TRK TTL and ART NAME . When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the dis- play . Playing CDs En 36 Section 08
Black plate (37,1) <CRB2123-A/U>37 Operating from the function display 1 1 1 2 2 2 The following functions can also be operated from the head unit îÂÂs display. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat play is turned on. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î RDM (random play) î SCAN (scan play)î P AUSE (pause) î FF/REV (search method) ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play Repeat play lets you hear the same track over again. 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn repeat play on. RPT :ON appears in the display . The track cur- rently playing will play to the end and then re- peat. 3 Press q to turn repeat play off. RPT :OFF appears in the display . The track cur- rently playing will continue to play and then play the next track. Note If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse, repeat play is automatically cancelled. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks on the CD in a random order . 1 Press F to select RDM. P ress F until RDM appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn random play on. RDM :ON appears in the display. T racks will play in a random order . 3 Press q to turn random play off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. T racks will continue to play in order . Scanning tracks of a CD Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. 1 Press F to select SCAN. P ress F until SCAN appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. Playing CDs En 37 Section 08 Playing CDs
Black plate (38,1) <CRB2123-A/U>38 3 When you find the desired track press q to tur n scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track will continue to play . # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display , select SCAN again by press- ing F. Note After scanning of a CD is finished, normal play- back of the tracks will begin again. Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Selecting the search method Y ou can switch the search method between fast for ward/reverse and searching ever y 10 tracks. 1 Press F to select FF/REV. P ress F until FF/REV appears in the display . # If the search method ROUGH has been pre- viously selected, ROUGH will be displayed. 2 Press m or n to select the search method. P ress m or n until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV î F ast for ward and reverse ! ROUGH î Searching ever y 10 tracks Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the title. The next time you insert a CD for which you have entered a title, the title of that CD will be displayed. Entering disc titles Use the disc title input feature to store up to 48 CD titles in the unit. Each title can be up to 8 characters long. 1 Play the CD that you want to enter a title for . 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display . # When playing a CD TEXT disc, you cannot switch to TITLE IN. The disc title will have already been recorded on a CD TEXT disc. 3 Press r or q to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of r will display a letter of the al- phabet in A B C ... X Y Z, numbers and sym- bols in 1 2 3 ... > [ ] order . Each press of q will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 4 Press n to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, press n to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . P ress m to move backwards in the display . 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing n after entering the title. When you press n one more time, the en- tered title is stored in memor y . Playing CDs En 38 Section 08
Black plate (39,1) <CRB2123-A/U>39 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! Titles remain in memory, even af ter the disc has been removed from the unit, and are re- called when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 48 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Displaying disc titles Y ou can display the text information of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play time î DISC TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the cur- rently playing disc is shown in the display. # When a CD with a disc title is inserted, the disc title automatically begins to scroll through the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO D-TTL is displayed. Using CD TEXT functions Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play time î DISC TTL (disc title) î ART NAME (disc artist name) î TRK TTL (track title) î ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T -TTL ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL , ART NAME , TRK TTL and ART NAME . When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the dis- play . Playing CDs En 39 Section 08 Playing CDs
Black plate (40,1) <CRB2123-A/U>40 Listening to MP3/WMA 1 1 1 3 4 4 4 2 Head unit îÂÂs display 4 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 5 5 5 When the separately sold display is connected to this unit, the listed information will appear on it. Information display These are the basic steps necessary to play an MP3/WMA with your DVD player . More ad- vanced MP3/WMA operation is explained starting on page 42. 1 MP3/WMA indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 2 Folder number indicator Shows the number of folder currently play- ing. ! On the head unit îÂÂs display , if the folder number is more than 100, F in the folder number indicator disappears. 3 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. ! If the play time is more than 100 minutes, only the last two digits of play time (min- ute) is displayed on the head unit îÂÂs dis- play . 4 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. ! If a track number 100 to 199 is selected, d will light up above the last two digits of the track number . ! If a track number 200 or more is selected, d will blink above the last two digits of the track number . 5 ROM indicator Shows when the MP3/WMA file is playing. When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD -EXTRA and MIXED -MODE CDs, CD/ROM is dis- played. Basic operation of MP3/WMA 1 Press r or q to select a folder . # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have an MP3/WMA file recorded in it. # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), press and hold BAND . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 2 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. # If you select ROUGH, pressing and holding m or n enables you to search ever y 10 tracks in the current folder . (Refer to Selecting the search method on page 45.) 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, press o or p. P ressing p skips to the start of the next track. Pressing o once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Playing MP3/WMA En 40 Section 09
Black plate (41,1) <CRB2123-A/U>41 # If the remote control is set to DVH mode, o and p are assigned to other functions. Use m and n instead for the DVD mode functions controlled by o and p. 4 T o stop playback, press g. # When you stop MP3/WMA playback by press- ing g, that location on the disc is memorized en- abling playback from that point when you play the disc again. # T o resume playback, press f . # If the remote control is set to DVH, g does not operate. Notes ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD-EXTRA and MIXED-MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD- DA with BAND. ! If you have switched between playback of MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD -DA), play- back starts at the first track on the disc. ! This DVD player can play back an MP3/WMA file recorded on CD-ROM. (Refer to page 91 for files that can be played back.) ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up CD playback and the sound being issued. When being read in, FRMTREAD is displayed. ! Playback is carried out in order of file number . F olders are skipped if they contain no files. (If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02.) ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). ! If the inserted disc contains no files that can be played back, NON-PLA Y is displayed. ! There is no sound on fast forward or reverse. ! If the inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digital rights management (DRM) , SKIPPED is displayed while the pro- tected file is skipped. ! If all the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM, PROTECT is displayed. ! When an MP3/WMA disc is inserted, folder name and file name begin to scroll to the left automatically . Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play. Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. Playing MP3/WMA En 41 Section 09 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (42,1) <CRB2123-A/U>42 Operating from the information display 1 1 1 This display lets you use the search function to specif y a track or a folder to search for de- sired track or folder , select the range for repeat play , and switch random play , scan play and pause playback on or off . 1 Information display Shows the function status. % Press DISPLA Y to switch the informa- tion display . P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following display modes: Information display î Folder Name (folder name display) î File Name (file name display) î T rack Title (track title display) î Artist Name (artist name display) î Album Title (album title display) î Comment (comment display)î Bit Rate (bit rate display) ! When playing back WMA files, album title and comment are not displayed. ! When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not displayed even af ter switching to bit rate. ( VBR will be displayed.) ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). ! If specific information has not been re- corded on an MP3/WMA disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No T rack Title ). ! Some characters may not be displayed properly . Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of FOLDER , FILE , TRK TTL , ART NAME , ALBM TTL , COMMENT and Bit Rate . When the recorded information is longer than 8 let- ters, you can scroll the text to the left so that the rest of the text information can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the display . Searching for a desired folder or track Y ou can use the search function to specify a track to search for a desired folder or track. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select a desired option. The selected option is highlighted. 2 Press NUMBER to input the desired number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . ! T o select 23, press 2 and 3 in order . î T o jump 10 folders or 10 tracks ahead of the selected one, press 10. # P ressing CLEAR cancels the input number . # Y ou can also select folders or tracks by mov- ing the joystick up or down. # Y ou cannot select folders or tracks by using NUMBER when the remote control is set to DVH mode. In this case, use the joystick to select folders or tracks. Playing MP3/WMA En 42 Section 09
Black plate (43,1) <CRB2123-A/U>43 3 While the input number is displayed, click the joystick. Play of the selected folder or track starts. Selecting repeat range F or MP3/WMA playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: Folder (folder repeat), T rack (one-track repeat) and Disc (repeat all tracks). 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the repeat range option. The repeat range option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! Folder î Repeat the current folder ! Disc î Repeat the current disc ! T rack î Repeat just the current track Notes ! If you select other folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to Disc. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during T rack , the repeat play range changes to Folder. ! When Folder is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if Disc is selected. Setting random play Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, Folder and Disc. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the random option. The random option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! ON î T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected Folder or Disc ranges ! OFF î T racks will continue to play in order Setting scan play While you are using Folder, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using Disc , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Move the joystick left or right to select the scan option. The scan option is highlighted. 2 Move the joystick up or down to switch to the desir ed setting. This switches you to the selected setting. ! ON î The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played ! OFF î T racks will continue to play 3 When you find the desired track, move the joystick up or down to cancel the scan play . Note After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Pausing playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. % Press f during playback. The icon e is displayed and playback is paused. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, press f again. Playing MP3/WMA En 43 Section 09 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (44,1) <CRB2123-A/U>44 Operating from the function display 1 1 1 2 2 2 The following functions can also be operated from the head unit îÂÂs display. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î RDM (random play) î SCAN (scan play)î P AUSE (pause) î FF/REV (search method) ! T o return to the playback display , press BAND . Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play F or MP3/WMA playback, there are three re- peat play ranges: FLD (folder repeat), TRK (one-track repeat) and DSC (repeat all tracks). 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the repeat range. P ress m or n until the desired repeat range appears in the display. ! FLD î Repeat the current folder ! TRK î Repeat just the current track ! DSC î Repeat all tracks Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DSC. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK, the repeat play range changes to FLD. ! When FLD is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if DSC is selected. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in a random order within the repeat range, FLD and DSC. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on this page. 2 Press F to select RDM. P ress F until RDM appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn random play on. RDM :ON appears in the display. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected FLD or DSC ranges. 4 Press q to turn random play off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. T racks will continue to play in order . Playing MP3/WMA En 44 Section 09
Black plate (45,1) <CRB2123-A/U>45 Note If you turn random play on during FLD and then return to the playback display , FRDM appears in the display. Scanning folders and tracks While you are using FLD, the beginning of each track in the selected folder plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using DSC , the beginning of the first track of each folder is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press F to select SCAN. P ress F until SCAN appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or folder) press q to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track (or folder) will continue to play. # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display , select SCAN again by press- ing F. Notes ! After track or folder scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! If you turn scan play on during FLD and then return to the playback display , FSCN appears in the display . Pausing MP3/WMA playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Selecting the search method Y ou can switch the search method between fast for ward/reverse and searching ever y 10 tracks. 1 Press F to select FF/REV. P ress F until FF/REV appears in the display . # If the search method ROUGH has been pre- viously selected, ROUGH will be displayed. 2 Press m or n to select the search method. P ress m or n until the desired search method appears in the display. ! FF/REV î F ast for ward and reverse ! ROUGH î Searching ever y 10 tracks Searching every 10 tracks in the current folder If the current folder contains over 10 tracks, you can search ever y 10 tracks. When one folder contains a lot of tracks, you can roughly search for the track you want to play. 1 Select the search method ROUGH. Refer to Selecting the sear ch method on this page. Playing MP3/WMA En 45 Section 09 Playing MP3/WMA
Black plate (46,1) <CRB2123-A/U>46 2 Press and hold m or n to search every 10 tracks in the current folder . # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding n recalls the last track of the folder . Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching ever y 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding n recalls the last track of the folder . # If the current folder contains less than 10 tracks, pressing and holding m recalls the first track of the folder . Also, if the remaining number of tracks after searching ever y 10 tracks is less than 10, pressing and holding m recalls the first track of the folder . Displaying text information on MP3/WMA disc T ext information recorded on a MP3/WMA disc can be displayed. % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play time î FOLDER (folder name) î FILE (file name) î TRK TTL (track title) î ART NAME (ar- tist name) î ALBM TTL (album title) î COMMENT (comment)î Bit rate # When playing back WMA files, album title and comment are not displayed. # When playing back MP3 files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the bit rate value is not dis- played even after switching to bit rate. ( VBR will be displayed.) # This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). # If specific information has not been recorded on an MP3/WMA disc, NO XXXX will be dis- played (e.g., NO NAME). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of FOLDER , FILE , TRK TTL , ART NAME , ALBM TTL and COMMENT . When the re- corded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the text information can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the text information begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the text informatio n will appear in the display . Playing MP3/WMA En 46 Section 09
Black plate (47,1) <CRB2123-A/U>47 Playing a CD 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 Y ou can use this unit to control a multi-CD player , which is sold separately . These are the basic steps necessar y to play a CD with your multi-CD player . More advanced CD operation is explained starting on the next page. 1 Disc number indicator Shows the disc currently playing. 2 Play time indicator Shows the elapsed playing time of the cur- rent track. 3 T rack number indicator Shows the track currently playing. 1 Press SOURCE to select the multi-CD player . P ress SOURCE until you see MUL TI CD dis- played. 2 Select a disc you want to listen to with the NUMBER (1 îÂÂ6) buttons. F or discs 1 to 6, press the corresponding but- ton number . F or discs 7 to 12, press and hold the corre- sponding numbers, such as 1 for disc 7, until the disc number appears in the display . # Y ou can also sequentially select a disc by pressing r or q. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, press and hold m or n. 4 T o skip back or forward to another track, press m or n. P ressing m skips to the start of the next track. Pressing n once skips to the start of the current track. Pressing again will skip to the previous track. Notes ! When the multi-CD player per forms the pre- paratory operations, READY is displayed. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02 is dis- played, refer to the multi-CD player owner îÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. ! When you select a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player , the disc and track titles begin to scroll to the lef t auto - matically . Selecting a track directly When using the remote control, you can select a track directly by entering the desired track number . 1 Press DIRECT. T rack number input display appears. 2 Press NUMBER buttons to enter the de- sired track number . ! T o select 3, press 3. ! T o select 10, press 1 and 0 in order . # Y ou can cancel the input number by pressing CLEAR . 3 Press DIRECT. The track of entered number will play. Multi-CD Player En 47 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (48,1) <CRB2123-A/U>48 Note After entering the number input mode, if you do not per form an operation within about eight sec- onds, the mode is automatically canceled. 50-disc multi-CD player Only those functions described in this manual are supported by 50-disc multi- CD players. This unit is not designed to operate disc title list functions with a 50-disc multi-CD player . About the disc title list functions, please refer to Selecting discs from the disc title list on page 52. Introduction of advanced multi-CD player operation 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 Function display Shows the function status. 2 RPT indicator Shows when repeat range is selected to cur- rent track. % Press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î LIST (disc title list) î RDM (random play) î SCAN (scan play) î ITS-P (ITS play) î P AUSE (pause) î COMP (compression and DBE) # T o return to the playback display , press BAND. Note If you do not operate the function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically returned to the playback display . Repeating play There are three repeat play ranges for the multi-CD player: MCD (multi-CD player re- peat), TRK (one-track repeat) and DSC (disc re- peat). 1 Press F to select RPT. P ress F until RPT appears in the display . Multi-CD Player En 48 Section 10
Black plate (49,1) <CRB2123-A/U>49 2 Press m or n to select the repeat range. P ress m or n until the desired repeat range appears in the display. ! MCD î Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRK î Repeat just the current track ! DSC î Repeat the current disc Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to MCD. ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRK, the repeat play range changes to DSC. Playing tracks in random order Random play lets you play back tracks in ran- dom order within the repeat range, MCD and DSC . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press F to select RDM. P ress F until RDM appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn random play on. RDM :ON appears in the display. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. 4 Press q to turn random play off. RDM :OFF appears in the display. T racks will continue to play in order . Note If you turn random play on during DSC and then return to the playback display , DRDM appears in the display. Scanning CDs and tracks While you are using DSC, the beginning of each track on the selected disc plays for about 10 seconds. When you are using MCD, the be- ginning of the first track of each disc is played for about 10 seconds. 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 Press F to select SCAN. P ress F until SCAN appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn scan play on. SCAN :ON appears in the display. The first 10 seconds of each track of the current disc (or the first track of each disc) is played. 4 When you find the desired track (or disc) press q to turn scan play off. SCAN :OFF appears in the display. The track (or disc) will continue to play . # If the display has automatically returned to the playback display , select SCAN again by press- ing F. Notes ! After track or disc scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks will begin again. ! If you turn scan play on during DSC and then return to the playback display , DSCN appears in the display . Pausing CD playback P ause lets you temporarily stop disc playback. 1 Press F to select P AUSE. P ress F until P AUSE appears in the display. Multi-CD Player En 49 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (50,1) <CRB2123-A/U>50 2 Press r to turn pause on. P AUSE:ON appears in the display. Play of the current track pauses. 3 Press q to turn pause off. P AUSE:OFF appears in the display. Play will re- sume at the same point that you turned pause on. Note P ress f on the remote control repeatedly dur- ing playback to turn pause on or off . Using ITS playlists ITS (instant track selection) lets you make a playlist of favorite tracks from those in the multi-CD player magazine. Af ter you have added your favorite tracks to the playlist you can turn on ITS play and play just those selec- tions. Creating a playlist with ITS programming Y ou can use ITS to enter and play back up to 99 tracks per disc from up to 100 discs (with the disc titles). (With multi-CD players sold be- fore the CDX-P1250 and CDX-P650, up to 24 tracks can be stored in the playlist.) 1 Play a CD that you want to program. P ress r or q to select a CD. 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press F to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press F repeatedly , the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input) î ITS (ITS program- ming) 3 Select a desired track by pressing m or n. 4 Press r to store the currently playing track in the playlist. ITS IN is displayed briefly and the currently playing selection is added to your playlist. The display then shows ITS again. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note After data for 100 discs has been stored in mem- or y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Playback from your ITS playlist ITS play lets you listen to the tracks that you have entered into your ITS playlist. When you turn on ITS play , tracks from your ITS playlist in the multi-CD player will begin to play . 1 Select the repeat range. Refer to Repeating play on page 48. 2 Press F to select ITS-P. P ress F until ITS-P appears in the display. 3 Press r to turn ITS play on. ITS-P:ON appears in the display. Playback be- gins of those tracks from your playlist within the previously selected MCD or DSC ranges. # If no tracks in the current range are pro- grammed for ITS play , then EMPTY is displayed. 4 Press q to turn ITS play off. ITS-P:OFF appears in the display. Playback will continue in normal order from the currently playing track and CD. Multi-CD Player En 50 Section 10
Black plate (51,1) <CRB2123-A/U>51 Erasing a track from your ITS playlist T o delete a track from your ITS playlist, make sure ITS play is on. If ITS play is already on, skip to step 2. 1 Play the CD that contains the track you want to delete from your ITS playlist and turn ITS play on. Refer to Playback from your ITS playlist on the previous page. 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press F to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press F until ITS appears in the display . 3 Select a desired track by pressing m or n. 4 Press q to erase the track from your ITS playlist. The currently playing selection is erased from your ITS playlist and playback of the next track from your ITS playlist begins. # If there are no tracks from your playlist in the current range, EMPTY is displayed and normal play resumes. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Erasing a CD from your ITS playlist T o delete all tracks of a CD from your ITS play- list, make sure ITS play is off . 1 Play the CD that you want to delete. P ress r or q to select a CD. 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display , then press F to select ITS. After TITLE IN is displayed, press F until ITS appears in the display . 3 Press q to erase all tracks on the cur - rently playing CD from your ITS playlist. All tracks on the currently playing CD are erased from your playlist and ITS CLR is dis- played. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Using disc title functions Y ou can input CD titles and display the titles. Then you can easily search for and play a de- sired disc. Entering disc titles Use the disc title input feature to store up to 100 CD titles (with ITS playlist) into the multi- CD player . Each title can be up to 8 characters long. 1 Play the CD with the title you want to enter . P ress r or q to select a CD. 2 Press F and hold until TITLE IN appears in the display . After TITLE IN is displayed, press F repeatedly , the following functions appear in the display: TITLE IN (disc title input) î ITS (ITS program- ming) # When playing a CD TEXT disc on a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player , you cannot switch to TITLE IN . The disc title will have already been re- corded on a CD TEXT disc. Multi-CD Player En 51 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (52,1) <CRB2123-A/U>52 3 Press r or q to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of r will display a letter of the al- phabet in A B C ... X Y Z, numbers and sym- bols in 1 2 3 ... > [ ] order . Each press of q will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 4 Press n to move the cursor to the next character position. When the desired letter is displayed, press n to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . P ress m to move backwards in the display . 5 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing n after entering the title. When you press n one more time, the en- tered title is stored in memor y . 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! Titles remain in memory, even af ter the disc has been removed from the magazine, and are recalled when the disc is reinserted. ! After data for 100 discs has been stored in memor y , data for a new disc will overwrite the oldest one. Displaying disc titles Y ou can display the text information of any disc that has had a disc title entered. % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Play time î DISC TTL (disc title) When you select DISC TTL, the title of the cur- rently playing disc is shown in the display. # If no title has been entered for the currently playing disc, NO D-TTL is displayed. Selecting discs from the disc title list Disc title list lets you see the list of disc titles that have been entered into the multi-CD player and lets you select one for playback. 1 Press F to select LIST. P ress F until LIST appears in the display. 2 Press m or n to scroll through the list of titles that have been entered. # If no title has been entered for a disc, title is not displayed. 3 Press r to play your favorite CD title. That selection will begin to play . Using CD TEXT functions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist îÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. Only these spe- cially encoded CD TEXT discs support the functions listed below . Displaying text information on CD TEXT discs % Press DISPLA Y. P ress DISPLA Y repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Multi-CD Player En 52 Section 10
Black plate (53,1) <CRB2123-A/U>53 Play time î DISC TTL (disc title) î ART NAME (disc artist name) î TRK TTL (track title) î ART NAME (track artist name) # If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, NO XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO T -TTL ). Scrolling text information in the display This unit can display the first 8 letters only of DISC TTL , ART NAME , TRK TTL and ART NAME . When the recorded information is longer than 8 letters, you can scroll the text to the lef t so that the rest of the title can be seen. % Press DISPLA Y and hold until the title begins to scroll to the left. The rest of the title will appear in the dis- play . Using compression and dynamic bass emphasis Y ou can use these functions only with a multi- CD player that supports them. Using COMP (compression) and DBE (dy- namic bass emphasis) functions lets you ad- just the sound playback quality of the multi- CD player . Each of the functions has a two- step adjustment. The COMP function balances the output of louder and softer sounds at high- er volumes. DBE boosts bass levels to give playback a fuller sound. Listen to each of the effects as you select them and use the one that best enhances the playback of the track or CD that you are listening to. 1 Press F to select COMP. P ress F until COMP appears in the display. # If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, NO COMP is displayed when you at- tempt to select it. 2 Press r or q to select your favorite setting. P ress r or q repeatedly to switch between the following settings: COMP OFF î COMP 1 î COMP 2 î COMP OFF î DBE 1 î DBE 2 Multi-CD Player En 53 Section 10 Multi-CD Player
Black plate (54,1) <CRB2123-A/U>54 Introduction of audio adjustments 1 1 4 7 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 6 6 6 1 Preset equalizer indicator Shows which equalizer preset is currently selected. When CUSTOM is selected, equalizer cur ve does not display . 2 SFEQ indicator Appears in the display when SFEQ function can be activated. 3 EQ-EX indicator Appears in the display when EQ-EX function can be activated. 4 CUSTOM indicator Shows when custom equalizer curve is cur- rently selected. 5 Loudness indicator Appears in the display when loudness is turned on. 6 SW indicator Shows when the subwoofer output is turned on. 7 Audio display Shows the audio adjustments status. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, the audio function will be changed to the multi-channel processor îÂÂs audio menu. For details, refer to Introduction of DSP ad- justments on page 61. % Press A to display the audio function names. P ress A repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing audio functions: FAD (balance adjustment) î EQ (equalizer cur ve adjustment) î B (bass and treble level adjustment) î LOUD (loudness) î SUB, W (subwoofer on/off setting)/ NOF AD (non fading output on/off setting) î 80: 0 (subwoofer set- ting)/ NOFAD (non fading output setting) î HPF (high pass filter)î SLA (source level ad- justment) # When SFEQ function has been selected or when EQ-EX is turned on and CUSTOM is se- lected as the equalizer cur ve, you can switch to B . # When the rear output and subwoofer control- ler setting is either R-SP :FUL and P/O :S/W or R-SP :S/W , you can switch to SUB, W . (Refer to page 81.) # Y ou can select the 80: 0 only when subwoofer output is turned on in SUB, W. # When the rear output and subwoofer control- ler setting is only R-SP :FUL and P/O :FUL, you can switch to the nonfading output on/off setting. (Refer to page 81.) # Y ou can select the nonfading output setting only when nonfading output is turned on in the nonfading output on/off setting. # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA. # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Note If you do not operate the audio function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display . Audio Adjustments En 54 Section 11
Black plate (55,1) <CRB2123-A/U>55 Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. There are six stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL Powerful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal CUSTOM Custom EQ FLA T Flat SPR-BASS Super bass ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer cur ve that you create. ! A separate CUSTOM cur ve can be created for each source. If you make adjustments, the equalizer cur ve settings will be memor- ized in CUSTOM. ! When EQ FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between EQ FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL î NA TURAL î VOCAL î CUSTOM î EQ FLA T î SPR-BASS Compensating for equalizer curves (EQ-EX) The EQ-EX function accentuates the effects of each equalizer curve. F urthermore, you can adjust bass and treble for each source when CUSTOM cur ve is selected. ! If SFEQ has been previously selected, press EQ-EX and hold to switch to EQ-EX and EQ-EX appears in the display. ! Y ou cannot use EQ-EX function and SFEQ function simultaneously. % Press EQ-EX to turn EQ-EX on. EQ-EX:ON appears in the display. EQ-EX is now on. # T o turn EQ-EX off , press EQ-EX. Setting the sound focus equalizer (SFEQ) Clarifying the sound image of vocals and in- struments allows the simple staging of a nat- ural, pleasant sound environment. Even greater listening enjoyment will be obtained if seating positions are chosen carefully . FRT1 boosts the treble on the front output and the bass on the rear output. FRT2 boosts the treble and the bass on the front output and the bass on the rear output. (The bass boost is the same for both front and rear .) F or both FRT1 and FRT2, H setting provides a more pro- nounced effect than L setting. ! Y ou cannot use EQ-EX function and SFEQ function simultaneously. 1 Press EQ-EX and hold to switch to SFEQ function. P ress EQ-EX and hold until SFEQ indicator ap- pears in the display . # T o switch to EQ-EX function, press EQ-EX and hold. 2 Press EQ-EX to select the desired SFEQ setting. P ress EQ-EX repeatedly to switch between the following settings: Audio Adjustments En 55 Section 11 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (56,1) <CRB2123-A/U>56 FRT1-H (front 1-high) î FRT1-L (front 1-low) î FRT2-H (front 2-high)î FRT2-L (front 2-low) î CUSTOM (custom)î SFEQ OFF (off) 3 Press m or n to select the desired position. P ress m or n until the desired position ap- pears in the display . L (left) î C (center) î R (right) Notes ! If you adjust the bass or treble, CUSTOM memorizes an SFEQ setting in which the bass and treble are adjusted for personal prefer- ence. ! If you switch the SFEQ setting, the HPF func- tion is automatically turned off . By turning the HPF function on after selecting the SFEQ set- ting, you can combine HPF function with SFEQ function. Using balance adjustment Y ou can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press A to select FAD. P ress A until FAD appears in the display . # If the balance setting has been previously ad- justed, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press r or q to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of r or q moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FAD :F15 î F AD :R15 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FAD : 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # When the rear output setting is R-SP :S/W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 81. 3 Press m or n to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press m or n, BAL : 0 is dis- played. Each press of m or n moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL : L 9 î BAL : R 9 is displayed as the left/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Adjusting equalizer curves Y ou can adjust the currently selected equalizer cur ve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer cur ve settings are memorized in CUSTOM. 1 Press A to select EQ. P ress A until EQ appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the equalizer band to adjust. Each press of m or n selects equalizer bands in the following order: EQ-L (low) î EQ-M (mid) î EQ-H (high) 3 Press r or q to adjust the level of the equalizer band. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the level of the equalization band. 6 î îÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. Note If you make adjustments, CUSTOM curve is up- dated. Audio Adjustments En 56 Section 11
Black plate (57,1) <CRB2123-A/U>57 Fine-adjusting equalizer curve Y ou can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (cur ve characteristics) of each currently selected cur ve band ( EQ-L/ EQ-M/ EQ-H). Level (dB) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W F requency (Hz) 1 Press A and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display . 2 Press A to select the band for adjust- ment from among low , mid and high. P ress A repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: Low î Mid î High î B (bass adjustment) î T (treble adjustment) # If EQ-EX function has been selected and only when EQ-EX is turned on and CUSTOM is se- lected as the equalizer cur ve, you can switch to B and T. 3 Press m or n to select the desired frequency . P ress m or n until the desired frequency appears in the display . Low : 40 î 80 î 100 î 160 (Hz) Mid: 200 î 500 î 1k î 2k (Hz) High: 3k î 8k î 10k î 12k (Hz) 4 Press r or q to select the desired Q factor . P ress r or q until the desired Q factor ap- pears in the display . 2N î 1N î 1W î 2W Note If you make adjustments, CUSTOM curve is up- dated. Adjusting bass and treble Y ou can adjust bass and treble settings. ! If EQ-EX function has been selected and EQ-EX turned on and CUSTOM selected as the equalizer cur ve, you can adjust bass and treble settings. ! If SFEQ has been set to FRT1, bass adjust- ment affects only the rear output: front out- put cannot be adjusted. ! If SFEQ has been set to FRT1 or FRT2 , tre- ble adjustment affects only the front out- put: rear output cannot be adjusted. Adjusting bass and treble level Y ou can adjust the bass and treble level. 1 Press A to select B. P ress A until B appears in the display. # If the treble level has been previously ad- justed, T will be displayed. 2 Press m or n to select bass or treble. P ress m and B is displayed. P ress n and T is displayed. 3 Press r or q to adjust the level. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the selected bass or treble level. 6 î î 6 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. Audio Adjustments En 57 Section 11 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (58,1) <CRB2123-A/U>58 Selecting bass frequency Y ou can select the bass frequency for level ad- justment. 1 Press A and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display . 2 Press A to select B. P ress A until B appears in the display. 3 Press m or n to select the desired frequency . P ress m or n until the desired frequency appears in the display . 40 î 63 î 100 î 160 (Hz) Selecting treble frequency Y ou can select the treble frequency for level adjustment. 1 Press A and hold until frequency and the Q factor (e.g., F- 80:Q1W) appears in the display . 2 Press A to select T. P ress A until T appears in the display . 3 Press m or n to select the desired frequency . P ress m or n until the desired frequency appears in the display . 2k î 4k î 6k î 10k (Hz) Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 Press A to select LOUD. P ress A until LOUD appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn loudness on. Loudness level (e.g., LOUD :MID) appears in the display . 3 Press m or n to select a desired level. Each press of m or n selects level in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HI (high) 4 Press q to turn loudness off. LOUD :OFF appears in the display. Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . 1 Press A to select SUB, W. P ress A until SUB, W appears in the display . # When the rear output and subwoofer control- ler setting is either R-SP :FUL and P/O :S/W or R-SP :S/W , you can switch to SUB, W . (Refer to page 81.) 2 Press r to turn subwoofer output on. SUB, W:NOR appears in the display . Subwoo - fer output is now on. # If the subwoofer output phase has been set to the reverse, SUB, W:REV will be displayed. # T o turn subwoofer output off , press q. 3 Press m or n to select the phase of subwoofer output. P ress m to select reverse phase and REV ap- pears in the display . P ress n to select nor- mal phase and NOR appears in the display. Adjusting subwoofer settings When the subwoofer output is on, you can ad- just the cut-off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . Audio Adjustments En 58 Section 11
Black plate (59,1) <CRB2123-A/U>59 1 Press A to select 80: 0. P ress A until 80: 0 appears in the display . # When the subwoofer output is on, you can se- lect 80: 0. # If the subwoofer setting has been previously adjusted, the frequency of that previously se- lected will be displayed instead of 80 . 2 Press m or n to select cut-off fre- quency . Each press of m or n selects cut- off fre- quencies in the following order: 50 î 80 î 125 (Hz) Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the subwoo- fer . 3 Press r or q to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the level of the subwoofer . 6 î îÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Using nonfading output When the nonfading output setting is on, the audio signal does not pass through this unit îÂÂs low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is out- putted through the RCA output. 1 Press A to select non fading output on/ off setting. P ress A until NOFAD:ON appears in the dis- play . # When the rear output and subwoofer control- ler setting is only R-SP :FUL and P/O :FUL, you can switch to the nonfading output on/off setting. (Refer to page 81.) 2 Press r to turn non fading output on. NOFAD:ON appears in the display . Nonfading output is now on. # T o turn non fading output off , press q. Adjusting nonfading output level When the nonfading output is on, you can ad- just the level of nonfading output. 1 Press A to select non fading output set- ting. P ress A until NOFAD: 0 appears in the dis- play . 2 Press r or q to adjust the output level of the non fading. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the level of the non fading. 6 î îÂÂ6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. 1 Press A to select HPF. P ress A until HPF appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn high pass filter on. HPF : 80 appears in the display . High pass fil- ter is now on. # If the high pass filter has been previously ad- justed, the frequency of that previously selected will be displayed instead of HPF : 80 . # T o turn high pass filter off , press q. 3 Press m or n to select cut-off fre- quency . Each press of m or n selects cut- off fre- quencies in the following order: Audio Adjustments En 59 Section 11 Audio Adjustments
Black plate (60,1) <CRB2123-A/U>60 50 î 80 î 125 (Hz) Only frequencies higher than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the front or rear speakers. Note If you switch the SFEQ setting, the HPF function is automatically turned off . By turning the HPF function on af ter selecting the SFEQ setting, you can combine HPF function with SFEQ function. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. 2 Press A to select SLA. P ress A until SLA appears in the display. 3 Press r or q to adjust the source vo- lume. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the source volume. SLA : 4 î SLA : îÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3/WMA are set to the same source level adjustment volume auto- matically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Audio Adjustments En 60 Section 11
Black plate (61,1) <CRB2123-A/U>61 Introduction of DSP adjustments Important F ollowing functions are effective only when you connected a Pioneer multi-channel processor (DEQ-P7650) to this unit. By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly . 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 A uto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cr oss-over frequency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Operating the DSP menu 1 2 2 2 1 DSP display Shows the DSP status. 2 Subwoofer indicator Shows when the subwoofer output is turned on. % Press A to display the DSP function names. P ress A repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing DSP functions: POSI (position selector) î FAD (balance ad- justment) î SLA (source level adjustment) î DRC (dynamic range control)î DIRCT (di- rect) î Lo/Ro (down mix) # When selecting the FM tuner as the source, you cannot switch to SLA, DRC. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to DRC. # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Note If you do not operate the DSP function within about 30 seconds, the display is automatically re- turned to the source display . Digital Signal Processor En 61 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (62,1) <CRB2123-A/U>62 Operating the DSP details menu 1 2 1 DSP display Shows the DSP status. 2 PL II indicator Shows when the Dolby Pro Logic II is turned on. % Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to display the DSP function names. After FRONT is displayed, press A repeatedly, the following DSP functions appear in the dis- play : FRONT (speaker setting) î HPF (cross-over fre- quency) î FRT -L (speaker output level) î T TONE (test tone)î INITIAL (time align- ment mode) î FL (time alignment adjustment) î AT E Q (auto-equalizer on/off)î PEQ (3-band parametric equalizer) # When neither F/L nor F/R is selected in POSI, you cannot switch to INITIAL or FL . # Y ou cannot select AT E Q if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. # T o return to the display of each source, press BAND . Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live per formance. ! The acoustics of different per formance en- vironments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors and ceilings. At a live performance you hear music in three stages: direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections, or re- verberations. Those factors are progr amed into the SFC circuitr y to recreate the acous- tics of various per formance settings. % Press EQ-EX to select the desired SFC mode. P ress EQ-EX repeatedly to switch between the following mode: MUSICAL (musical) î DRAMA (drama) î ACTION (action)î JAZZ (jazz)î HALL (hall) î CLUB (club)î OFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL, DRAMA or ACTION), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ, HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II off . Digital Signal Processor En 62 Section 12
Black plate (63,1) <CRB2123-A/U>63 Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used in con- junction with the SFC, the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a pa- noramic sound that envelops you. 1 Press A to select POSI. P ress A until POSI appears in the display. 2 Press m/ n/ r/ q to select a listen- ing position. P ress one of these, m/ n/ r/ q, to select a listening position as listed in the table. Button Di splay Position m F/L F ront seat left n F/R F ront seat right r FRT F ront seats q ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, press the same button again. Note When you make adjustments for listening posi- tion, the speakers are automatically set for appro- priate output levels. Y ou can tailor them if you want as discussed under the heading of Adjust- ing the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using balance adjustment Y ou can select a fader/balance setting that provides an ideal listening environment in all occupied seats. 1 Press A to select FAD. P ress A until FAD appears in the display . # If the balance setting has been previously ad- justed, BAL will be displayed. 2 Press r or q to adjust front/rear speaker balance. Each press of r or q moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FAD :F25 î F AD :R25 is displayed as the front/ rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FAD : 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 Press m or n to adjust left/right speaker balance. When you press m or n, BAL : 0 is dis- played. Each press of m or n moves the left/right speaker balance towards the left or the right. BAL :L25 î BAL :R25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from left to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM tuner volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with the level of the source you wish to ad- just. Digital Signal Processor En 63 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (64,1) <CRB2123-A/U>64 2 Press A to select SLA. P ress A until SLA appears in the display. 3 Press r or q to adjust the source vo- lume. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the source volume. SLA : 4 î SLA : îÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM tuner volume level can also be ad- justed with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD and MP3/WMA are set to the same source level adjustment volume auto- matically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and sof test sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. 1 Press A to select DRC. P ress A until DRC appears in the display. # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch this mode. 2 Press r to turn the dynamic range control on. DRC :ON appears in the display. Dynamic range control is now on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , press q . Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. 1 Press A to select DIRCT. P ress A until DIRCT appears in the display. 2 Press r to turn the dir ect control on. DIRCT :ON appears in the display . Direct con- trol is now on. # T o turn direct control off , press q. Notes ! All audio functions are locked out during DIRCT :ON except VOLUME and PLII . ! If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2-channel Dolby Digital audio and you select DIRCT :ON , audio is heared only over front left/ right speakers. Using the down-mix function Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 1 Press A to select Lo/Ro. P ress A until Lo/Ro appears in the display. # If the down mix Lt/Rt has been previously se- lected, Lt/Rt will be displayed. Digital Signal Processor En 64 Section 12
Black plate (65,1) <CRB2123-A/U>65 2 Press m or n to switch the down mix settings. ! Lt/Rt î Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). ! Lo/Ro î Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! If both the center and the rear speakers are set to OFF, you cannot use this function. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. 1 Press and hold EQ-EX until PLII appears in the display . 2 Press EQ-EX to select the desired mode. ! MOV (movie) î The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUS (music) î The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA T (matrix) î The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! PLII :OFF î T urn Dolby Pro Logic II off # Y ou can adjust the music mode only when MUS (music) has been selected. # T o cancel Dolby Pro Logic II, press EQ-EX again to select PLII : OFF. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. ! P anorama ( P ANO ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting îÂÂwraparound î effect. ! Dimension ( DIME) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either towards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENT) allows center- channel sounds to be positioned between the center speaker and the left/right speak- ers. It improves the lef t-center-right stage presentation for both the driver and the front passenger . 1 Press EQ-EX until MUS (music) appears in the display . 2 Press n to select P ANO. P ress r or q to turn P ANO on/off . 3 Press n again to select DIME. Each time you press r or q it move s the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 î îÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/surround speaker balance moves from front to sur- rounds. 4 Press n again to select CENT. Each time you press r or q it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 îÂÂ7. 3 is the default and it îÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the left/right speakers. Digital Signal Processor En 65 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (66,1) <CRB2123-A/U>66 Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LRG (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SML (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SML or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF. ! Set the front or rear speaker to LRG if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) î CENT (center speak- er) î REAR (rear speakers) î SUB.W (subwoo- fer) î PHASE (subwoofer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON. 3 Press r or q to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each press of r or q selects the size in the following order: SML (small) î LRG (large) î OFF (off) # Y ou cannot select OFF, when FRONT (front speakers) have been selected. # Y ou can select ON or OFF , when SUB.W (sub- woofer) has been selected. # Y ou can switch REV (reverse phase) or NOR (normal phase), when PHASE (subwoofer setting) has been selected. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Correcting the subwoofer î s phase If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn îÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer îÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the subwoo- fer . Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) î CENT (center speak- er) î REAR (rear speakers) î SUB.W (subwoo- fer) î PHASE (subwoofer setting) 3 Press r to turn the subwoofer output on. 4 Press n to select PHASE (subwoofer setting). 5 Press r or q to select the subwoofer output phase. P ress r to select NOR (normal phase). Press q to select REV (reverse phase). 6 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with Pro Logic II turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: Digital Signal Processor En 66 Section 12
Black plate (67,1) <CRB2123-A/U>67 ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is SML or LRG and no center speaker is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SML or LRG . Selecting a cross-over frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo- fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SML, you can select a fre- quency , under which sounds are reproduced through a LRG speaker or subwoofer . 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select HPF. After FRONT is displayed, press A until HPF appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: F (front speakers) î C (center speaker) î R (rear speakers) î S (subwoofer) 3 Press r or q to select cross-over fre- quency for the selected speaker . Each press of r or q selects cross- over fre- quencies in the following order: 63 î 80 î 100 î 125 î 160 î 200 (Hz) 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross- over frequency of the subwoofer îÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SML speaker H.P .F . (high- pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LRG or OFF . Adjusting the speaker output levels Y ou can readjust the speaker output levels using a test tone while listening to music. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select FRT -L. After FRONT is displayed, press A until FRT -L appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: FRT -L (front speaker left) î CENT (center speaker) î FRT -R (front speaker right) î RER-R (rear speaker right) î RER-L (rear speaker left) î SUB.W (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF. 3 Press r or q to adjust the speaker output level. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 î îÂÂ10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at T TONE . Both provide the same results. Digital Signal Processor En 67 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (68,1) <CRB2123-A/U>68 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone A convenient test tone allows you to easily get the overall balance right among the speakers. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select T TONE. After FRONT is displayed, press A until T TONE appears in the display . 2 Press n to start the test tone output. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display. FRT -L (front speaker left) î CENT (center speaker) î FRT -R (front speaker right) î RER-R (rear speaker right) î RER-L (rear speaker left) î SUB.W (subwoofer) # Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 4 to stop the test tone. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set OFF. 3 Press r or q to adjust the speaker output level. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 î îÂÂ10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 4 Press m to stop the test tone output. 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their îÂÂab- solute î output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at FRT -L . Both provide the same re- sults. Using the time alignment Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select INITIAL. After FRONT is displayed, press A until INITIAL appears in the display. # Y ou cannot select INITIAL when neither F/L nor F/R is selected in POSI. 2 Press m or n to select the time alignment. ! INITIAL î Initial time alignment (factor y set- ting) ! CUSTOM î Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! AUTO T A î Time alignment created by auto T A and EQ. (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto- time alignment and auto-equalizing) on the next page.) ! T A :OFF î T urn the time alignment off # T o turn time alignment off , select T A :OFF . # Y ou cannot select AUTO T A if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 3 Press BAND to cancel the time align- ment mode. Digital Signal Processor En 68 Section 12
Black plate (69,1) <CRB2123-A/U>69 Adjusting the time alignment By adjusting the distance between each speaker and a selected listening position, you can insert delay times into the speaker output to obtain a correct sound image and overall level balance. Although this is automatically achieved when you set the listening position, the time alignment feature provides a fine ad- justment. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select FL. After FRONT is displayed, press A until FL ap- pears in the display . # Y ou cannot select FL when neither F/L nor F/R is selected in POSI. 2 Press m or n to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of m or n selects the speaker in the following order: FL (front speaker left) î C (center speaker) î FR (front speaker right) î RR (rear speaker right) î RL (rear speaker left)î SW (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF. 3 Press r or q to adjust the distance between the selected speaker and the lis- tening position. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the distance. 500.0 (cm) î 0.0 (cm) is displayed as the distance is increased or de- creased. 4 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Using the auto-equalizer The auto -equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on this page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select A T EQ. After FRONT is displayed, press A until AT E Q appears in the display . # Y ou cannot use this function if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 2 Press r to turn the auto-equalizer on. A T EQ:ON appears in the display . # T o turn auto-equalizer off , press q. Auto T A an d EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. The auto -time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto -equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto-equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto -equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto TA and EQ. Digital Signal Processor En 69 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (70,1) <CRB2123-A/U>70 î When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) î When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker îÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp îÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cross-over frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. î When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . î When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: î The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 63.) î The graphic equalizer cur ve switches to EQ FLA T . (Refer to page 72.) î When a subwoofer is connected to this unit, it will be adjusted automatically to both subwoofer output and high pass fil- ter setting for rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Digital Signal Processor En 70 Section 12
Black plate (71,1) <CRB2123-A/U>71 Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roo f, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver î s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carry out auto T A and EQ. 3 T urn the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car îÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. # P ress SOURCE to turn the source on if this unit is turned off . 4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 63. # If no position is selected before you start auto T A and EQ, F/L is selected automatically . 5 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 6 Press and hold EQ to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on the multi-channel pro- cessor . 8 Press r to start the auto T A and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speakers are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, press any keys. # T o cancel auto TA and EQ part way through, press BAND. 10 When auto T A and EQ is completed, COMPLETE is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ error messages on page 89.) 11 Press BAND to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. Digital Signal Processor En 71 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (72,1) <CRB2123-A/U>72 12 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or mal- function. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match car interior acoustic characteristics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves: Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL P owerful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal EQ FLA T Flat CUSTOM1 Custom 1 CUSTOM2 Custom 2 SPR-BASS Super bass ! CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When EQ FLA T is selected no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between EQ FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL î NA TURAL î VOCAL î EQ FLA T î CUSTOM1î CUSTOM2î SPR-BASS Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer Fo r CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and cen- ter equalizer curves separately by selecting a center frequency , an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! A CUSTOM2 curve can be created com- mon to all sources. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn îÂÂt easy . W e recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other speakers. 1 Press A and hold until FRONT appears in the display , then press A to select PEQ. After FRONT is displayed, press A until PEQ appears in the display . # Adjusted PEQ settings are memorized in CUSTOM1 . 2 Press r or q to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each press of r or q selects the speaker in the following order: FRT (front speakers) î CEN (center speaker) î RER (rear speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set at OFF. 3 Press n and then press r or q to select the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each press of r or q selects equalizer bands in the following order: LOW (low) î MID (mid) î HI (high) Digital Signal Processor En 72 Section 12
Black plate (73,1) <CRB2123-A/U>73 4 Press n and then press r or q to select the center frequency of selected band. Each press of r or q selects the frequency in the following order: 40Hz î 50Hz î 63Hz î 80Hz î 100Hz î 125Hz î 160Hzî 200Hzî 250Hzî 315Hzî 400Hzî 500Hz î 630Hz î 800Hz î 1kHz î 1.2kHz î 1.6kHz î 2kHz î 2.5kHz î 3.1kHz î 4kHz î 5kHz î 6.3kHz î 8kHz î 10kHz î 12kHz 5 Press n and then press r or q to adjust the equalizer level. Each press of r or q increases or de- creases the equalizer level. 6 î îÂÂ6 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. 6 Press n and then press r or q to select the desired Q factor . Each press r or q switches between the following Q factor: WID (wide) î NAR (narrow) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way. 7 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Note Y ou can select a center frequency for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc- tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. Digital Signal Processor En 73 Section 12 Digital Signal Processor
Black plate (74,1) <CRB2123-A/U>74 Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 1 Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. This menu can be operated only by using the re- mote control. 1 SET -UP MENU Shows the setup menu status. 1 Press g. 2 Press MENU when the disc is stopped. SET -UP MENU is displayed. 3 Move the joystick left or right to switch between LANG (language settings), PICT (picture settings) and GEN (general settings). Note If you press MENU during display of a SET -UP MENU , the SET -UP MENU is canceled and the unit returns to the previous display . Returning to the previous display The SET -UP MENU lets you switch between displays of different setting options. T o con- tinue per forming different settings, or if you make a mistake during setting, pressing RETURN takes you back to the previous dis- play each time you press it. Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select SUBTITLE LANG. in the SET -UP MENU (LANG.). SUBTITLE LANG. is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to select the desired language. The currently set language is indicated with the blue box. The language selected with the joystick is highlighted. # T o switch to the second language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. # T o return to the first language select menu, move the joystick left or right. 4 Click the joystick. A subtitle language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. Setting up the DVD player En 74 Section 13
Black plate (75,1) <CRB2123-A/U>75 ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language dur- ing playback with SUBTITLE (S.TITILE). (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 24.) ! Even if you use SUBTITLE (S.TITILE) to switch the subtitle language, this does not affect the settings here. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . When you select GENERAL When you select GENERAL, a language code input display is shown. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 94, use the number but- tons to input the four digit code of the desired language, and then click the joystick. Note P ressing CLEAR cancels the input numbers. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select AUDIO LANG. in the SET -UP MENU (LANG.). AUDIO LANG. is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. An audio language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to select the desired audio language. The currently set language is indicated with the blue box. The language selected with the joystick is highlighted. # T o switch to the second audio language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. # T o return to the first audio language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. 4 Click the joystick. The audio language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language dur- ing playback with AUDIO. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 23.) ! Even if you use AUDIO to switch the audio language, this does not affect the settings here. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . ! If you have selected GENERAL, refer to When you select GENERAL on this page. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select MENU LANG. in the SET -UP MENU (LANG.). MENU LANG. is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. A menu language menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to select the desired menu language. The currently set language is indicated with the blue box. The language selected with the joystick is highlighted. # T o switch to the second menu language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. # T o return to the first menu language select menu, move the joystick lef t or right. Setting up the DVD player En 75 Section 13 Setting up the DVD player
Black plate (76,1) <CRB2123-A/U>76 4 Click the joystick. The menu language is set. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . ! If you have selected GENERAL, refer to When you select GENERAL on the previous page. Setting assist subtitles on or off Assist subtitles offer explanations for the au- rally impaired. However , they are only dis- played if they are recorded on the DVD. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select ASSIST in the SET -UP MENU (LANG.). ASSIST is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. Each time you click the joystick the selected setting switches on or off . Setting angle icon display Y ou can set it up so that the angle icon ap- pears on scenes where the angle can be switched. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select ANGLE in the SET -UP MENU (PICT). ANGLE is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. Angle icon display is set on or off . Notes ! Y ou can also switch the angle during playback with ANGLE. (Refer to Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) on page 24.) ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display you use. ! When using a regular display, select either LETTER BOX or P ANSCAN . Selecting 16:9 may result in an unnatural picture. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select TV ASPECT in the SET -UP MENU (PICT). TV ASPECT is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. TV aspect menu is displayed. 3 Move the joystick up or down to select the desired TV aspect. The currently set TV aspect is indicated with blue box. The TV aspect selected with the joy- stick is highlighted. ! 16:9 î Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX î The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P ANSCAN î The picture is cut short at the right and lef t of the screen Setting up the DVD player En 76 Section 13
Black plate (77,1) <CRB2123-A/U>77 4 Click the joystick. The selected TV aspect is set. Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P ANSCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P ANSCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (See page 9.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc îÂÂs instruc- tions. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict the viewing of violent and adult- oriented scenes by children. Y ou can set the parental lock level in steps as desired. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level When you first use this function, register your code number . If you do not register a code number , parental lock will not operate. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select P ARENT AL in the SET -UP MENU (GEN). P ARENT AL is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. P arental lock setting menu is displayed. 3 Press NUMBER buttons to input a four digit code number . 4 Click the joystick. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 5 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired level. ! LEVEL 8 î Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 îÂÂLEVEL 2 î Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 î Playback of discs for children only is possible 6 Click the joystick. The parental lock level is set. Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Y ou can confirm it by looking at the disc pack- age, included literature or on the disc itself . With discs that do not feature a recorded par- ental lock level, you cannot use parental lock. ! With some discs, parental lock operates to skip certain scenes only , afte r which normal playback resumes. For details, refer to the disc îÂÂs instructions. ! P ressing RETURN takes you back to the pre- vious display . Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select P ARENT AL in the SET -UP MENU (GEN). P ARENT AL is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick. P arental lock setting menu is displayed. Setting up the DVD player En 77 Section 13 Setting up the DVD player
Black plate (78,1) <CRB2123-A/U>78 3 Press NUMBER buttons to input the re- gistered code number . 4 Click the joystick. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. Press CLEAR and input the correct code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 5 Move the joystick left or right to select the desired level. 6 Click the joystick. The parental lock level is set. Note P ressing RETURN takes you back to the previous display . If you forget your code number Refer to Changing the level on the previous page, and press CLEAR 10 times. The regis- tered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVDs disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. 1 Move the joystick up or down to select DVD AUTO PLA Y in the SET -UP MENU (GEN). DVD AUTO PLA Y is highlighted. 2 Click the joystick to tur n automatic playback on or off. # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on page 28). Setting remote control code type When the remote control operation switch is set to DVD, changing the remote control code type enables you to operate the P ioneer DVD player by the supplied remote control. There are three remote codes, code type A, code type B and code type DVH. When using this unit with a multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV -P9), se- lect code A. When using this unit only, select code DVH. ! With this unit, code B cannot be used. 1 Set the remote control selection switch on the left side of the remote control to the appropriate position with a pen tip or other pointed instrument . ! If you select DVH mode, there is no need to take the following procedure. ! If you select A/ B mode, take the following procedure and change the code type to the appropriate type. 2 Press 7 and 0 on the remote control si- multaneously to change the code type. Initially , the code type is set to A. Each time you press 7 and 0 simultaneously on the re- mote control the code type switches between A and B . Setting up the DVD player En 78 Section 13
Black plate (79,1) <CRB2123-A/U>79 Adjusting initial settings 1 Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. 1 Function display Shows the function status. 1 Press SOURCE and hold until the unit turns off. 2 Press F and hold until function name appears in the display . 3 Press F to select one of the initial set- tings. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing settings: Clock î FM (FM tuning step) î AM (AM tuning step) î W ARN (warning tone) î AUX (auxiliar y setting) î DIMMR (dimmer) î R-SP (rear out- put and subwoofer controller) î TEL (tele- phone muting/attenuation) î DSC-A (disc auto) î D_A TT (digital attenuation) î A-RESET (audio reset) # T o cancel initial settings, press BAND. # Y ou can also cancel initial settings by holding down F until the unit turns off . # When the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ- P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate D_A TT and A-RESET instead of R-SP . Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 Press F to select clock. P ress F repeatedly until clock appears in the display . 2 Press m or n to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. P ressing m or n will select one segment of the clock display: Hour î Minute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will blink. 3 Press r or q to set the clock. P ressing r will increase the selected hour or minute. Pressing q will decrease the se- lected hour or minute. Setting the FM tuning step The FM tuning step employed by seek tuning can be switched between 100 kHz, the preset step, and 50 kHz. 1 Press F to select FM. P ress F repeatedly until FM appears in the dis- play . 2 Press m or n to select the FM tuning step. P ressing m or n will switch the FM tuning step between 100 kHz and 50 kHz. The se- lected FM tuning step will appear in the dis- play . Initial Settings En 79 Section 14 Initial Settings
Black plate (80,1) <CRB2123-A/U>80 Note If seek tuning is per formed in 50 kHz steps, sta- tions may be tuned in imprecisely . T une in the sta- tions with manual tuning or use seek tuning again. Setting the AM tuning step The AM tuning step can be switched between 9 kHz, the preset step, and 10 kHz. When using the tuner in North, Central or South America, reset the tuning step from 9 kHz (531 î 1 602 kHz allowable) to 10 kHz (530 î 1 640 kHz allowable). 1 Press F to select AM. P ress F repeatedly until AM appears in the dis- play . 2 Press m or n to select the AM tun- ing step. P ressing m or n will switch the AM tuning step between 9 kHz and 10 kHz. The selected AM tuning step will appear in the display. Switching the warning tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within five seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. 1 Press F to select W ARN. P ress F repeatedly until WARN appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn war ning tone on. W ARN :ON appears in the display. # T o turn warning tone off , press q. Switching the auxiliary setting It is possible to use auxiliary equipment with this unit. Activate the auxiliar y setting when using auxiliar y equipment connected to this unit. 1 Press F to select AUX. P ress F repeatedly until AUX appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn auxiliary setting on. AUX :ON appears in the display. # T o turn auxiliar y setting off , press q. Note When this unit is connected to the DEQ-P7650, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or di- gital. However , when you use AUX as the source, make sure the AUX mode is set to analog. AUX digital should not be used with this unit. Switching the dimmer setting T o prevent the display from being too bright at night, the display is automatically dimmed when the car îÂÂs headlights are turned on. Y ou can turn the dimmer on or off . 1 Press F to select DIMMR. P ress F repeatedly until DIMMR appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn dimmer on. DIMMR:ON appears in the display. # T o turn dimmer off , press q. Initial Settings En 80 Section 14
Black plate (81,1) <CRB2123-A/U>81 Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller This unit îÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put) can be used for full-range speaker ( R-SP :FUL) or subwoofer ( R-SP :S/W) connec- tion. If you switch the rear output setting to R-SP :S/W , you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for rear full-range spea k- er connection ( R-SP :FUL). When rear output is connected to full range speakers (when R-SP :FUL is selected), you can connect the RCA subwoofer output to a subwoofer . In this case, you can select whether to use the sub- woofer controller îÂÂs (low pass filter , phase) built-in P/O :S/W or the auxiliar y P/O :FUL . 1 Press F to select R-SP. P ress F repeatedly until R-SP appears in the display . 2 Press r or q to switch the rear out- put setting. P ressing r or q will switch between R-SP :FUL (full-range speaker) and R-SP :S/W (subwoofer) and that status will be displayed. # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select R-SP :FUL. # When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, set for subwoofer R-SP :S/W . # When the rear output setting is R-SP :S/W, you cannot change the subwoofer controller . 3 Press m or n to switch the subwoo- fer output or non fading output. P ressing m or n will switch between P/O :S/W and P/O :FUL and that status will be displayed. Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the nonfading output (refer to Using nonfading output on page 59) or subwoofer output (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 58) in the audio menu on. ! If you change the subwoofer controller , sub- woofer output and nonfading output in the audio menu return to the factor y settings. Switching the telephone muting/attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated automatically when a call is made or re- ceived using a cellular telephone connected to this unit. 1 Press F to select TEL. P ress F repeatedly until TEL appears in the dis- play . 2 Press m or n to switch the tele- phone muting/attenuation. P ressing m or n will switch between TEL :A (attenuation) and TEL :MUT (muting) and that status will be displayed. # Y ou can select in the following setting: ! TEL :MUT î Muting ! TEL :A20 î Attenuation (TEL :A20 has a stronger effect than TEL :A10) ! TEL :A10 î Attenuation Notes ! The sound is muted or attenuated, MUTE or AT T are displayed and no audio adjustment is possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Initial Settings En 81 Section 14 Initial Settings
Black plate (82,1) <CRB2123-A/U>82 Switching the automatic disc playback Y ou can turn automatic disc playback on or off when you insert a disc into the disc loading slot. When this function is on, the disc will be automatically played after it is inserted into the disc loading slot. Initially , this function is set to on. 1 Press F to select DSC-A. P ress F repeatedly until DSC-A appears in the display . 2 Press r to turn automatic playback on. DSC-A:ON appears in the display. # P ress q to turn automatic playback off . Correcting distorted sound Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer cur ve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW. Normally , leave the set- ting at HI to ensure quality sound. 1 Press F to select D_A TT. P ress F repeatedly until D_A TT appears in the display . 2 Press r or q to select LOW or HI . P ressing r or q will switch between HI (high) and LOW (low) and that status will be displayed. # T o cancel initial settings, press BAND. # Y ou can also cancel initial settings by holding down F until the unit turns off . Resetting the audio functions Only when the multi-channel processor (e.g., DEQ-P7650) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. Y ou can reset audio functions other than the following settings. ! V olume setting (refer to Adjusting the vo- lume on page 16) ! Listening position setting (refer to Using the position selector on page 63) ! F ader/balance setting (refer to Using bal- ance adjustment on page 63) ! SLA (source level adjustment) setting (refer to Adjusting source levels on page 63) ! Dynamic range control (refer to Using the dynamic range control on page 64) ! Direct control setting (refer to Using the di- rect control on page 64) ! Down-mix setting (refer to Using the down- mix function on page 64) 1 Press F to select A-RESET. P ress F repeatedly until A-RESET appears in the display . 2 Press r to display RESETOK? . RESETOK? appears in the display. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, press BAND . 3 Press n to display REALL Y? . REALL Y? appears in the display . # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, press BAND . 4 Press r to reset audio functions. COMPLETE appears in the display. Initial Settings En 82 Section 14
Black plate (83,1) <CRB2123-A/U>83 T ur ning the clock display on or of f Y ou can turn the clock display on or off . % Press CLOCK to turn the clock display on or off. Each press of CLOCK turns the clock display on or off . # The clock display disappears temporarily when you per form other operations, but the clock display appears again after 25 seconds. Note Even when the sources are off , the clock display appears on the display . Pressing CLOCK turns the clock display on or off . Setting the level indicator These are two stored level indicator to select from. % Press EQ and hold to select the level in- dicator . P ress EQ and hold repeatedly to switch be- tween the following settings: Level indicator 1 î Level indicator 2 î Level in- dicator full î Level indicator off Note When the optical inputs 1 and 2 on DEQ-P7650 are occupied and AUX is connected to this unit, the level indicators may be incorrectly dis- played. Using the AUX source An IP -BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) lets you connect this unit to auxiliar y equipment fea- turing RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Interconnector owner îÂÂs man- ual. Selecting AUX as the source % Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. P ress SOURCE until AUX appears in the dis- play . # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. F or more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 80. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, press F and hold until TITLE IN ap- pears in the display . 2 Press r or q to select a letter of the alphabet. Each press of r will display a letter of the al- phabet in A B C ... X Y Z, numbers and sym- bols in 1 2 3 ... > [ ] order . Each press of q will display a letter in the reverse order , such as Z Y X ... C B A order . 3 Press n to move the cursor to the next character position. When the letter you want is displayed, press n to move the cursor to the next position and then select the next letter . P ress m to move backwards in the display . Other Functions En 83 Section 15 Other Functions
Black plate (84,1) <CRB2123-A/U>84 4 Move the cursor to the last position by pressing n after entering the title. When you press n one more time, the en- tered title is stored in memor y . 5 Press BAND to return to the playback display . Switching between digital and analog When this unit is connected to the DEQ- P7650, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or digital. 1 Press SOURCE to select AUX as the source. P ress SOURCE until AUX appears in the dis- play . # If the auxiliary setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. F or more details, see Switch- ing the auxiliar y setting on page 80. 2 Press BAND to switch the modes. P ress BAND repeatedly to switch between the following modes: ANALOG (analog) î DIGIT AL (digital) Note When this unit is connected to the DEQ-P7650, you can switch to the AUX mode to analog or di- gital. However , when you use AUX as the source, make sure the AUX mode is set to analog. AUX digital should not be used with this unit. Introduction of DVD operation Y ou can use this unit with a separately sold DVD player or multi-DVD player . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player îÂÂs or multi-DVD player îÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player î so r multi-DVD player îÂÂs operation manual. Operation Y ou can use the following function with this unit. (Reference page is in this manual.) ! Using ITS playlist and disc title functions (Refer to the next page.) Also, operation of the following function with this unit differs. (Reference page is in this manual.) ! F unction menu switching (Refer to this page.) Function menu switching % During DVD playback, press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î P AUSE (pause) % During Video CD playback, press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î P AUSE (pause) % During CD playback, press F to display the function names. P ress F repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing functions: RPT (repeat play) î RDM (random play) î SCAN (scan play)î ITS-P (ITS play) î P AUSE (pause) Other Functions En 84 Section 15
Black plate (85,1) <CRB2123-A/U>85 Notes ! When using this unit with multi-DVD player , you can switch to ITS-P. ! Repeat play function is different depending on the disc types. î During DVD playback, press m or n to select the repeat range. î During Video CD or CD playback, press r or q to turn repeat play on or off . Using ITS playlist and disc title functions During CD playback when using this unit with a multi-DVD player , you can use these func- tions. Operation is same as for multi-CD player . Please refer to multi- CD player section. Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using BOOK.M. % Press BOOK.M to turn pause on when selecting the following sources: ! DVD î Built-in DVD player ! S DVD î DVD player/multi-DVD player ! MUL TI CD î Multi-CD player # T o turn pause off , press BOOK.M again. % Press BOOK.M and hold to tur n BSM on when selecting TUNER as the source. P ress BOOK.M and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press BOOK.M again. % Press BOOK.M and hold to tur n BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress BOOK.M and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press BOOK.M again. Other Functions En 85 Section 15 Other Functions
Black plate (86,1) <CRB2123-A/U>86 T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn îÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn îÂÂt operate. Leads and connectors are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once more that all connections are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install the correct fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocessor to oper- ate incorrectly . T urn the unit off and then on. Operation with the remote con- trol isn îÂÂt possible. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorrect. Switch to the correct remote control mode. (P age 15) The remote control code is incor- rect. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. (P age 78) Batter y power is low . Load new batter y . (P age 9) Some operations are prohibited with certain discs. Check by using another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty. Clean disc. (P age 90) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play . Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly . Connect the cables correctly. The unit is performing still, slow mo- tion or frame-by- frame playback. There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The icon is displayed, and op- eration is not possible. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc îÂÂs organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback. After pressing g once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olume level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly . The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriate setting for your display. (P age 76) Additional Information En 86 Appendix
Black plate (87,1) <CRB2123-A/U>87 Symptom Cause Action (See) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 6, P age 96) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (P age 77) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number . (P age 77) Y ou have forgot ten your code num- ber . P ress CLEAR 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 78) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings. Y ou cann ot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch betwee n items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch betwee n items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subtitle language settings selected in SET -UP MENU . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in SET -UP MENU . Switching to a selected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in SET -UP MENU is not recorded on the disc. Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cann ot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes recorded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angles when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremely unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibiting copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizon tal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Additional Information En 87 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (88,1) <CRB2123-A/U>88 Symptom Cause Action (See) Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. DSP Symptom Cause Action Speakers are not available to be adjusted. Their size settings is at OFF . Make the correct size settings. (P age 66) Time alignment is not available. Listening pos ition is not set cor- rectly . Set listening position correctly . (P age 63) Speaker size settings is at OFF . Make the correct size settings. (P age 66) The subwoofer is not available to switch its phase. The subwoofer is set to OFF . Set the subwoofer to ON. (P age 66) Bass content is not heard. The subwoofer is set to OFF and yet other speakers are set to OFF or SML in size. Make the correct settings. (If no subwoofer is installed, the front or rear speaker needs to be set to LRG.) (P age 66) Ocassionally no sounds are out- put when Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on. The center speaker setting is at SML or LRG whereas no center speaker is installed. Change the center speaker size setting to OFF . (If the audio source is mono and Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on, sound is heard over the center speaker only .) (P age 66) Occasionally no sounds are heard over speakers other than the center one. Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on. T urn Dolby Pro Logic II off . (If the audio source is mono and Dolby P ro Logic II is turned on, sound is heard over the center speaker only .) (P age 65) T urning dynamic range control on has no effects. The currently reproduced sound is not Dolby Digital coded. The feature is only effective on Dolby Digital sounds. (P age 64) No sounds are heard. Optical cables are incorrectly con- nected. Connect the cables correctly. Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest P ioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to record the error message. Error messages Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. TEMP The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit îÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. Additional Information En 88 Appendix
Black plate (89,1) <CRB2123-A/U>89 Message Cause Action (See) NON-PLA Y The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play . The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly . ERROR-05 Electrical or mechanical T urn the ignition ON and OFF , or switch to a different source, then back to the DVD player . PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by digital rights manage- ment (DRM) Replace disc. SKIPPED The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protected by digital rights management (DRM) Replace disc. Error messages on the display Message Cause Action (See) ERROR-02 Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Check that the disc is loaded correctly . THERMAL PROTECTION IN MOTION The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit îÂÂs temperature returns to within normal operating limits. DIFFERENT REGION DISC The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . NON-PLA Y ABLE DISC This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play . The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly . Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display . If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action ERR_MIC Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Additional Information En 89 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (90,1) <CRB2123-A/U>90 Message Cause Action ERR_FSP , ERR_FLSP , ERR_FRSP , ERR_CSP , ERR_RLSP , ERR_RRSP , ERR_SW The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the microphone correctly . ERR_NOIS The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the microphone correctly . DVD player and care ! Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular , non-round, shaped discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play prop- erly . ! Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warping before playing. Discs that have cracks, scratches or are warped may not play properly . Do not use such discs. ! Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed) sur face when handling the disc. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not expose the discs to high temperatures. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! If the heater is used in cold weather , con- densation may form on components inside the DVD player . Condensation may cause the DVD player to not operate properly . If you think that condensation is a problem turn off the DVD player for an hour or so to allow it to dr y out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth to remove the moisture. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! When DVD -R/DVD-RW discs are used, playback is possible only for discs which have been recorded with the Video format (video mode). It is not possible to play back DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the V ideo Recording format (VR mode). Additional Information En 90 Appendix
Black plate (91,1) <CRB2123-A/U>91 ! It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with the V ideo format (video mode), be- cause of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this unit. ! It is not possible to play back DVD -ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (For details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) ! Playback of CD-R/C D-RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto- rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD -R/CD-RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! This unit conforms to the track skip func- tion of the CD-R/CD -RW disc. The tracks containing the track skip information are skipped automatically (in case of audio data (CD -DA)). ! If you insert a CD-RW disc into this unit, time to playback will be longer than when you insert a conventional CD or CD-R disc. ! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD -RW discs before using them. MP3 and WMA files ! MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3 and refers to an audio compression technology standard. ! WMA is short for Windows Media " Audio and refers to an audio compression tech- nology that is developed by Microsoft Cor- poration. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . ! With some applications used to encode WMA files, this unit may not operate cor- rectly . ! Depending on the version of Windows Media Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! This unit allows playback of MP3 files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD -RW discs. Disc re- cordings compatible with level 1 and level 2 of ISO9660 and with the Romeo and Joliet file system can be played back. ! It is possible to play back multi-session compatible recorded discs. ! MP3/WMA files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a file name, including the extension (.mp3 or .wma), is 64, from the first character . ! The maximum number of characters which can be displayed for a folder name is 64. Additional Information En 91 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (92,1) <CRB2123-A/U>92 ! In case of files recorded according to the Romeo file system, only the first 64 charac- ters can be displayed. ! When playing discs with MP3/WMA files and audio data (CD-DA) such as CD -EXTRA and MIXED -MODE CDs, both types can be played only by switching mode between MP3/WMA and CD-DA. ! The folder selection sequence for playback and other operations becomes the writing sequence used by the writing software. For this reason, the expected sequence at the time of playback may not coincide with the actual playback sequence. However , there also is some writing sof tware which per- mits setting of the playback order . ! Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge into one another without a pause. When these discs are converted to MP3/WMA files and burned to a CD-R/CD-RW/CD - ROM, the files will be played back on this player with a short pause between each one, regardless of the length of the pause between tracks on the original audio CD. Important ! When naming an MP3 or a WMA file, add the corresponding filename extension (.mp3 or .wma). ! This unit plays back files with the filename ex- tension (.mp3 or .wma) as an MP3 or a WMA file. T o prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for files other than MP3 or WMA files. MP3 additional information ! Files are compatible with the ID3 T ag V er . 1.0, 1.1, 2.2 and 2.3 formats for display of album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track artist) and comments. Ver . 2.x of ID3 T ag is given priority when both V er . 1.x and V er . 2.x exist. ! The emphasis function is valid only when MP3 files of 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz frequen- cies are played back. (16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz sampling frequencies can be played back.) ! There is no m3u playlist compatibility . ! There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3 interactive) or mp3 PRO formats. ! The sound quality of MP3 files generally be- comes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using only discs recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps. WMA additional information ! This unit plays back WMA files encoded by Windows Media Player version 7 and 8. ! Y ou can only play back WMA files in the fre- quencies 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. ! The sound quality of WMA files generally becomes better with an increased bit rate. This unit can play recordings with bit rates from 48 kbps to 192 kbps, but in order to be able to enjoy sound of a certain quality, we recommend using discs recorded with a higher bit rate. ! This unit does not play back WMA files re- corded as VBR (variable bit rate). ! This unit doesn îÂÂt support the following for- mats. î Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (5.1ch) î Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless î Windows Media Audio 9 Voice Additional Information En 92 Appendix
Black plate (93,1) <CRB2123-A/U>93 About folders and MP3/ WMA files ! An outline of a CD -ROM with MP3/WMA files on it is shown below . Subfolders are shown as folders in the folder currently se- lected. 3 1 2 1 First level 2 Second level 3 Third level Notes ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is not possible to check folders that do not include MP3/WMA files. (These folders will be skipped without displaying the folder number .) ! MP3/WMA files in up to 8 tiers of folders can be played back. However , there is a delay in the start of playback on discs with numerous tiers. For this reason we recommend creating discs with no more than 2 tiers. ! It is possible to play back up to 253 items from folders on one disc. Additional Information En 93 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (94,1) <CRB2123-A/U>94 Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Alban ian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagas y (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T onga (to), 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongoli an (mn), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Malte se (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no ), 1415 W olof (wo), 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612 Additional Information En 94 Appendix
Black plate (95,1) <CRB2123-A/U>95 T erms Aspect ratio This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist îÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for - mat logic of CD-ROM folders and files. F or the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 charac ters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the î _î sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark îÂÂ. î and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally, DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the î WINAMP î soft- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). Additional Information En 95 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (96,1) <CRB2123-A/U>96 MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Organization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R, etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult- or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit îÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by V ideo CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive software and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . This unit îÂÂs region number is displayed on the bottom of the unit. Additional Information En 96 Appendix
Black plate (97,1) <CRB2123-A/U>97 Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality . WMA WMA is short for Windows Media " Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corpora- tion. WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Additional Information En 97 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (98,1) <CRB2123-A/U>98 Specifications General Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC (allowable voltage range: 12.0 î 14.4 V DC) Grounding system ................... Negative type Max. current consumption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 0 m m Nose ........................... 1 8 8 à5 8 à2 0 m m D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 à5 0 à1 6 5 m m Nose ........................... 1 7 0 à4 6 à1 5 m m W eight .......................................... 1 . 4 k g Audio Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15 000 Hz with no more than 5% THD. Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoofer) Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 î 8 W [2 W for 1 ch] al- lowable) P reout max output level/output impedance ..................................................... 2 . 2 V/1k W Equalizer (3-Band P arametric Equalizer): Low F requency ................ 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ12dB Mid F requency ................ 200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ12dB High F requency ................ 3.15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) Gain ............................ ñ12dB Loudness contour: L o w ....................................... 3.5 dB (100 Hz), 3 dB (10 kHz) M i d ....................................... 1 0 d B (100 Hz), 6.5 dB (10 kHz) High ..................................... 1 1 d B (100 Hz), 11 dB (10 kHz) (volume: îÂÂ30 dB) T one controls: Bass F requency ................ 40/63/100/160 Hz Gain ............................ ñ12dB T reble F requency ................ 2.5k/4k/6.3k/10k Hz Gain ............................ ñ12dB HPF : F requency .......................... 50/80/125 Hz Slope .................................... îÂÂ12 dB/oct Subwoofer: F requency .......................... 50/80/125 Hz Slope .................................... îÂÂ18 dB/oct Gain ...................................... ñ12dB Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse DVD Player System .......................................... D V D video, Video CD, Com- pact disc audio system Usable discs .............................. D V D video, Video CD, Com- pact disc Region number: for Middle East Asian and South African models ........................................... 2 for Southeast Asian models ........................................... 3 for South American and Oceanian models ........................................... 4 Signal format: Sampling frequency ..... 44.1/48/96 kHz Number of quantization bits ........................................... 16/20/24; linear F requency response ............... 5 î 44 000 Hz (with DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 9 7 d B ( 1 kHz) (IEC -A net- work) (CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC -A network)) Dynamic range ......................... 9 5 d B ( 1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB (1 kHz)) Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz) Output level: Video .................................... 1 . 0 Vp-p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Audio ................................... 1. 0 V ( 1 k H z , 0 d B ) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t ereo) MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding format ......... Ve r. 7 & 8 Additional Information En 98 Appendix
Black plate (99,1) <CRB2123-A/U>99 FM tuner F requency range ...................... 87.5 î 108.0 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) 50 dB quieting sensitivity ..... 1 0 d B f (0.9 õV/75 W , mono) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 5 d B (IEC -A network) Distortion ..................................... 0 . 3 % ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz, stereo) 0.1 % (at 65 dBf , 1 kHz, mono) F requency response ............... 3 0 î 15 000 Hz (ñ3 dB) Stereo separation .................... 4 5 d B ( a t 6 5 d B f, 1 kHz) AM tuner F requency range ...................... 5 3 1 î 1 602 kHz (9 kHz) 530 î 1 640 kHz (10 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 1 8 õ V (S/N: 20 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 5 d B (IEC -A network) Infrared remote control W avelength ................................. 9 4 0 n m ñ 5 0 nm Output ........................................... typ; 12 mw/sr per Infrared LED Note Specifications and the design are subject to pos- sible modifications without notice due to im- provements. Additional Information En 99 Appendix Additional Information
Black plate (100,1) PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU , T OKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P .O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, K eetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555 PIONEER ELECTRONICS A USTRALIA PTY . L TD . 178-184 Boundar y Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate P arkway , Markham, Ontar io L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 H àá ý î Pl ø = l ø : ðî î - qî ï î õ 44 _13 î û q : (02) 2521-3588 H àû P î î /î îÂÂPl ø î / ] î î î î w/ àî L F m- à9 îÂÂ901-6 ä û q : (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright é 2005 by Pioneer Cor poration. All rights reser ved. Printed in China <CRB2123-A/U> RC,RD ,RI <KMIZX> <05F00000> <CRB2123-A/U>100